Driving for Your Toyota Prius 4 Door Fifth Generation (2023-2026)

237  
Driving  
5
5-1. Before driving  
PCS (Pre-Collision System)  
.................................. 293  
Driving the vehicle....... 239  
Cargo and luggage ..... 246  
Vehicle load limits ....... 249  
Trailer towing .............. 250  
Dinghy towing ............. 250  
5-2. Driving procedures  
Power (ignition) switch 251  
Transmission............... 256  
Turn signal lever ......... 262  
Parking brake.............. 263  
Brake Hold .................. 266  
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)  
.................................. 305  
LCA (Lane Change Assist)  
.................................. 310  
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)  
.................................. 313  
PDA (Proactive driving  
assist)........................ 320  
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic  
Alert).......................... 326  
RSA (Road Sign Assist)  
.................................. 329  
5
5-3. Operating the lights and  
wipers  
Dynamic radar cruise con-  
trol ............................. 331  
Headlight switch.......... 269  
Cruise control.............. 342  
AHB (Automatic High  
Beam)........................ 272  
Emergency Driving Stop  
System ...................... 345  
Windshield wipers and  
washer....................... 275  
Traffic Jam Assist........ 348  
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)  
.................................. 354  
5-4. Refueling  
Opening the fuel tank cap  
.................................. 279  
Safe Exit Assist ........... 359  
Intuitive parking assist. 363  
5-5. Using the driving support  
systems  
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic  
Alert) function ............ 373  
Toyota Safety Sense  
3.0/Traffic Jam Assist soft-  
ware update .............. 282  
RCD (Rear Camera Detec-  
tion) function.............. 378  
PKSB (Parking Support  
Brake)........................ 382  
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0  
.................................. 284  
Driver monitor ............. 292  
238  
Driving  
5
Parking Support Brake  
function (static objects to  
the front and rear/static  
objects around the vehicle)  
.................................. 388  
Parking Support Brake func-  
tion (rear-crossing vehi-  
cles)........................... 392  
Parking Support Brake  
function (rear pedestrians)  
.................................. 393  
Toyota Teammate  
Advanced Park.......... 395  
Driving mode select switch  
.................................. 422  
Driving assist systems 424  
5-6. Driving tips  
Winter driving tips ....... 429  
239  
5-1. Before driving  
5-1.Before driving  
2 If the parking brake is  
released, set the parking  
brake. (P.263)  
Driving the vehic le  
The following procedures  
should be observed to  
ensure safe driving:  
3 Shift the shift position to P.  
(P.257)  
Check that the shift position indica-  
tor shows P and the parking brake  
indicator is illuminated.  
Driving procedure  
4 Press the power switch to  
stop the hybrid system.  
Starting the hybrid system  
P.251  
5 Slowly release the brake  
pedal.  
Driving  
1 With the brake pedal  
depressed, shift the shift  
position to D.  
6 Lock the door, making sure  
that you have the electronic  
key on your person.  
Check that the shift position indica-  
tor shows D.  
If parking on a hill, block the wheels  
as needed.  
2 If the parking brake is set,  
release the parking brake.  
(P.263)  
Starting off on a steep  
uphill  
5
1 Firmly depress the brake  
pedal and shift the shift posi-  
tion to D.  
If the parking brake is in automatic  
mode, the parking brake will be  
released automatically. (P.264)  
The hill-start assist control will be  
activated.  
3 Gradually release the brake  
pedal and gently depress the  
accelerator pedal to acceler-  
ate the vehicle.  
2 Set the parking brake.  
(P.263)  
3 Release the brake pedal and  
gently depress the accelera-  
tor pedal to accelerate the  
vehicle.  
Stopping  
1 Depress the brake pedal.  
2 If necessary, set the parking  
brake.  
4 Release the parking brake.  
(P.263)  
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an  
extended period of time, shift the  
shift position to P. (P.257)  
For electricity-saving and fuel-  
efficient driving  
Parking the vehicle  
1 Depress the brake pedal to  
stop the vehicle completely.  
Understand the system characteris-  
tics of the vehicle to use the func-  
tions of the hybrid system. Also,  
keep in mind that Plug-in Hybrid  
Electric Vehicles are similar to con-  
240  
5-1. Before driving  
ventional vehicles, and it is neces-  
sary to refrain from activities such  
as sudden acceleration. Refer to  
“Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle driv-  
ing tips”. (P.88)  
releasing the accelerator pedal will  
cause the “Stop” score to increase.  
Restraining the hybrid system  
output (Brake Override System)  
When the accelerator and brake  
pedals are depressed at the same  
time, the hybrid system output  
may be restrained.  
Driving in the rain  
Drive carefully when it is raining,  
because visibility will be reduced,  
the windows may become fogged-  
up, and the road will be slippery.  
A warning message is displayed  
on the multi-information display  
while the system is operating.  
Drive carefully when it starts to  
rain, because the road surface will  
be especially slippery.  
Breaking in your new Toyota  
To extend the life of the vehicle,  
observing the following precautions  
is recommended:  
Refrain from high speeds when  
driving on an expressway in the  
rain, because there may be a  
layer of water between the tires  
and the road surface, preventing  
the steering and brakes from  
operating properly.  
For the first 200 miles (300 km):  
Avoid sudden stops.  
For the first 600 miles (1000 km):  
• Do not drive at extremely high  
speeds.  
• Avoid sudden acceleration.  
• Do not drive continuously in low  
gears.  
• Do not drive at a constant speed  
for extended periods.  
ECO Accelerator Guidance  
(P.163)  
It is easier to drive in an Eco-friendly  
manner by driving while referring to  
the ECO Accelerator Guidance dis-  
play. Also, by using the ECO Accel-  
erator Guidance it is easier to  
Operating your vehicle in a for-  
eign country  
increase the “Eco Score” evaluation.  
When starting off:  
Comply with the relevant vehicle  
registration laws and confirm the  
availability of the correct fuel.  
(P.601)  
While staying within the ECO Accel-  
erator Guidance range, gradually  
depress the accelerator pedal and  
accelerate to the desired speed. If  
excessive acceleration is avoided,  
the “Start” score will increase.  
WARNING  
Observe the following precau-  
tions.  
Failure to do so may result in  
death or serious injury.  
When driving:  
After accelerating to the desired  
speed, release the accelerator  
pedal and drive at a stable speed  
within the ECO Accelerator Guid-  
ance range. By keeping the vehicle  
within the ECO Accelerator Guid-  
ance range, the “Cruise” score will  
increase.  
When starting the vehicle  
Always keep your foot on the  
brake pedal while stopped with  
the “READY” indicator is illumi-  
nated. This prevents the vehicle  
from creeping.  
When stopping:  
When stopping the vehicle, early  
241  
5-1. Before driving  
Do not drive the vehicle over or  
stop the vehicle near flammable  
materials such as leaves, paper  
or rags.  
WARNING  
When driving the vehicle  
Do not drive if you are unfamil-  
iar with the location of the brake  
and accelerator pedals to avoid  
depressing the wrong pedal.  
The exhaust system and  
exhaust gases can be  
extremely hot. These hot parts  
may cause a fire if there is any  
flammable material nearby.  
• Accidentally depressing the  
accelerator pedal instead of the  
brake pedal will result in sudden  
acceleration that may lead to an  
accident.  
During normal driving, do not  
turn off the hybrid system. Turn-  
ing the hybrid system off while  
driving will not cause loss of  
steering or braking control.  
However, power assist for the  
steering wheel may be lost mak-  
ing it difficult to steer smoothly  
before stopping the vehicle  
depending on the remaining  
charge in the 12-volt battery or  
usage conditions. In this situa-  
tion, you should pull over and  
stop the vehicle as soon as it is  
safe to do so.  
• When backing up, you may twist  
your body around, leading to a  
difficulty in operating the pedals.  
Make sure to operate the pedals  
properly.  
• Make sure to keep a correct  
driving posture even when mov-  
ing the vehicle only slightly. This  
allows you to depress the brake  
and accelerator pedals properly.  
5
In the event of an emergency,  
such as if it becomes impossible  
to stop the vehicle in the normal  
way: P.547  
• Depress the brake pedal using  
your right foot. Depressing the  
brake pedal using your left foot  
may delay response in an emer-  
gency, resulting in an accident.  
Use engine braking (downshift)  
to maintain a safe speed when  
driving down a steep hill.  
Using the brakes continuously  
may cause the brakes to over-  
heat and lose effectiveness.  
(P.256)  
The driver should pay extra  
attention to pedestrians when  
the vehicle is powered only by  
the electric motor (traction  
motor). As there is no engine  
noise, the pedestrians may mis-  
judge the vehicle’s movement.  
Even if the Acoustic Vehicle  
Alerting System is operating,  
drive with care as pedestrians in  
the vicinity may still not notice  
the vehicle if the surrounding  
area is noisy.  
Do not adjust the position of the  
steering wheel, the seat, inside  
rear view mirror (if equipped),  
Digital Rear-view Mirror (if  
equipped) or outside rear view  
mirrors while driving.  
Doing so may result in a loss of  
vehicle control.  
Always check that all passen-  
gers’ arms, head or other parts  
of their body are not outside the  
vehicle.  
242  
5-1. Before driving  
WARNING  
When shifting the shift posi-  
tion  
Do not drive across a river or  
through other bodies of water.  
This may cause electric/elec-  
tronic components to short cir-  
cuit, damage the hybrid system  
or cause other serious damage  
to the vehicle.  
Do not let the vehicle roll back-  
ward while a forward driving  
position is selected, or roll for-  
ward while the shift position is in  
R.  
Doing so may result in an acci-  
dent or damage to the vehicle.  
Do not drive in excess of the  
speed limit. Even if the legal  
speed limit permits it, do not  
drive over 85 mph (140 km/h)  
unless your vehicle has high-  
speed capability tires. Driving  
over 85 mph (140 km/h) may  
result in tire failure, loss of con-  
trol and possible injury. Be sure  
to consult a tire dealer to deter-  
mine whether the tires on your  
vehicle are high-speed capabil-  
ity tires or not before driving at  
such speeds.  
Do not shift the shift position to  
P while the vehicle is moving.  
Doing so can damage the trans-  
mission and may result in a loss  
of vehicle control.  
Do not shift the shift position to  
R while the vehicle is moving  
forward. Doing so can damage  
the transmission and may result  
in a loss of vehicle control.  
Do not shift the shift position to  
a driving position while the vehi-  
cle is moving backward. Doing  
so can damage the transmis-  
sion and may result in a loss of  
vehicle control.  
When driving on slippery  
road surfaces  
Sudden braking, acceleration  
and steering may cause tire  
slippage and reduce your ability  
to control the vehicle.  
Changing the shift position to N  
while the vehicle is moving will  
disengage the hybrid system.  
Regenerative braking is not  
available with the hybrid system  
disengaged.  
Sudden acceleration, engine  
braking due to shifting, or  
changes in engine speed could  
cause the vehicle to skid, result-  
ing in an accident.  
Do not shift the shift position  
with the accelerator pedal  
depressed. Changing the shift  
position to any positions other  
than P or N may lead to unex-  
pected rapid acceleration of the  
vehicle that may cause an acci-  
dent and result in death or seri-  
ous injury.  
After changing the shift position,  
make sure to confirm the cur-  
rent shift position displayed on  
the shift position indicator inside  
the meter.  
After driving through a puddle,  
lightly depress the brake pedal  
to make sure that the brakes  
are functioning properly. Wet  
brake pads may prevent the  
brakes from functioning prop-  
erly. If the brakes on only one  
side are wet and not functioning  
properly, steering control may  
be affected.  
243  
5-1. Before driving  
When the vehicle is parked  
WARNING  
Do not leave glasses, cigarette  
lighters, spray cans, or soft  
drink cans in the vehicle when it  
is in the sun.  
Doing so may result in the fol-  
lowing:  
If you hear a squealing or  
scraping noise (brake pad  
wear limit indicators)  
Have the brake pads checked and  
replaced by your Toyota dealer as  
soon as possible.  
• Gas may leak from a cigarette  
lighter or spray can, and may  
lead to a fire.  
Rotor damage may result if the  
pads are not replaced when  
needed.  
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle  
when the wear limits of the brake  
pads and/or those of the brake  
discs are exceeded.  
• The temperature inside the  
vehicle may cause the plastic  
lenses and plastic material of  
glasses to deform or crack.  
When the vehicle is stopped  
• Soft drink cans may fracture,  
causing the contents to spray  
over the interior of the vehicle,  
and may also cause a short cir-  
cuit in the vehicle’s electrical  
components.  
Do not depress the accelerator  
pedal unnecessarily.  
If the shift position is in any  
position other than P or N, the  
vehicle may accelerate sud-  
denly and unexpectedly, caus-  
ing an accident.  
Do not leave cigarette lighters in  
the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter  
is in a place such as the glove  
box or on the floor, it may be lit  
accidentally when luggage is  
loaded or the seat is adjusted,  
causing a fire.  
5
In order to prevent accidents  
due to the vehicle rolling away,  
always keep depressing the  
brake pedal while stopped with  
the “READY” indicator is illumi-  
nated, and apply the parking  
brake as necessary.  
Do not attach adhesive discs to  
the windshield or windows. Do  
not place containers such as air  
fresheners on the instrument  
panel or dashboard. Adhesive  
discs or containers may act as  
lenses, causing a fire in the  
vehicle.  
If the vehicle is stopped on an  
incline, in order to prevent acci-  
dents caused by the vehicle roll-  
ing forward or backward, always  
depress the brake pedal and  
securely apply the parking  
brake as needed.  
Do not leave a door or window  
open if the curved glass is  
coated with a metallized film  
such as a silver-colored one.  
Reflected sunlight may cause  
the glass to act as a lens, caus-  
ing a fire.  
Avoid revving or racing the  
engine.  
Running the engine at high  
speed while the vehicle is  
stopped may cause the exhaust  
system to overheat, which could  
result in a fire if combustible  
material is nearby.  
244  
5-1. Before driving  
WARNING  
If the electronically controlled  
brake system does not operate,  
do not follow other vehicles  
closely and avoid hills or sharp  
turns that require braking.  
Always apply the parking brake,  
shift the shift position to P, stop  
the hybrid system and lock the  
vehicle.  
Do not leave the vehicle unat-  
tended while the “READY” indi-  
cator is illuminated.  
If the vehicle is parked with the  
shift position in P but the park-  
ing brake is not set, the vehicle  
may start to move, possibly  
leading to an accident.  
In this case, braking is still pos-  
sible, but the brake pedal  
should be depressed more  
firmly than usual. Also, the brak-  
ing distance will increase. Have  
your brakes fixed immediately.  
The brake system consists of 2  
or more individual hydraulic sys-  
tems; if one of the systems fails,  
the other(s) will still operate. In  
this case, the brake pedal  
Do not touch the exhaust pipes  
while the “READY” indicator is  
illuminated or immediately after  
turning the hybrid system off.  
Doing so may cause burns.  
should be depressed more  
firmly than usual and the brak-  
ing distance will increase. Have  
your brakes fixed immediately.  
When taking a nap in the  
vehicle  
Always turn the hybrid system off.  
Otherwise, if you accidentally shift  
the shift position or depress the  
accelerator pedal, this could  
cause an accident or fire due to  
hybrid system overheating. Addi-  
tionally, if the vehicle is parked in  
a poorly ventilated area, exhaust  
gases may collect and enter the  
vehicle, leading to death or a seri-  
ous health hazard.  
NOTICE  
When driving the vehicle  
Do not depress the accelerator  
and brake pedals at the same  
time during driving, as this may  
restrain the hybrid system out-  
put.  
Do not use the accelerator  
pedal or depress the accelera-  
tor and brake pedals at the  
same time to hold the vehicle on  
a hill.  
When braking  
When the brakes are wet, drive  
more cautiously.  
Avoiding damage to vehicle  
parts  
Braking distance increases  
when the brakes are wet, and  
this may cause one side of the  
vehicle to brake differently than  
the other side. Also, the parking  
brake may not securely hold the  
vehicle.  
Do not turn the steering wheel  
fully in either direction and hold  
it there for an extended period  
of time.  
Doing so may damage the  
power steering.  
When driving over bumps in the  
road, drive as slowly as possible  
to avoid damaging the wheels,  
underside of the vehicle, etc.  
245  
5-1. Before driving  
If the shift control system is dam-  
aged by flooding, it may not be  
possible to shift the shift position  
to P, or from P to other positions.  
In this case, contact your Toyota  
dealer.  
NOTICE  
If you get a flat tire while driv-  
ing  
A flat or damaged tire may cause  
the following situations. Hold the  
steering wheel firmly and gradu-  
ally depress the brake pedal to  
slow down the vehicle.  
When parking the vehicle  
Always set the parking brake, and  
shift the shift position to P. Failure  
to do so may cause the vehicle to  
move or the vehicle may acceler-  
ate suddenly if the accelerator  
pedal is accidentally depressed.  
It may be difficult to control your  
vehicle.  
The vehicle will make abnormal  
sounds or vibrations.  
The vehicle will lean abnor-  
Sudden start restraint  
control (Drive-Start Con-  
trol [DSC])  
mally.  
Information on what to do in case  
of a flat tire (P.574)  
When encountering flooded  
When the following unusual  
operation is performed with the  
accelerator pedal depressed,  
the hybrid system output may be  
restrained.  
roads  
Do not drive on a road that has  
flooded after heavy rain, etc.  
Doing so may cause the following  
serious damage to the vehicle:  
5
Engine stalling  
When the shift position is  
Short in electrical components  
shifted to R*.  
Engine damage caused by  
water immersion  
When the shift position is  
shifted from P or R to forward  
In the event that you drive on a  
flooded road and the vehicle is  
flooded, be sure to have your  
Toyota dealer check the following:  
drive shift position such as D*.  
When the system operates, a mes-  
sage appears on the multi-informa-  
tion display. Read the message  
and follow the instruction.  
Brake function  
Changes in quantity and quality  
of oil and fluid used for the  
engine, transmission, tran-  
saxle, etc.  
*
: Depending on the situation, the  
shift position may not be  
changed.  
Lubricant condition for the bear-  
ings and suspension joints  
(where possible), and the func-  
tion of all joints, bearings, etc.  
Drive-Start Control (DSC)  
When the TRAC is turned off  
(P.425), sudden start restraint  
control also does not operate. If  
your vehicle have trouble escap-  
ing from the mud or fresh snow  
246  
5-1. Before driving  
due to sudden start restraint con-  
trol operation, deactivate TRAC  
(P.425) so that the vehicle may  
become able to escape from the  
mud or fresh snow.  
Cargo and luggage  
Take notice of the following  
information about storage  
precautions, cargo capacity  
and load:  
WARNING  
Things that must not be car-  
ried in the luggage compart-  
ment  
The following things may cause a  
fire if loaded in the luggage com-  
partment:  
Receptacles containing gaso-  
line  
Aerosol cans  
Storage precautions  
Observe the following precau-  
tions.  
Failure to do so may prevent the  
pedals from being depressed  
properly, may block the driver’s  
vision, or may result in items hit-  
ting the driver or passengers, pos-  
sibly causing an accident.  
Stow cargo and luggage in the  
luggage compartment when-  
ever possible.  
Do not stack cargo and luggage  
in the luggage compartment  
higher than the seatbacks.  
When you fold down the rear  
seats, long items should not be  
placed directly behind the front  
seats.  
Never allow anyone to ride in  
the luggage compartment. It is  
not designed for passengers.  
They should ride in their seats  
with their seat belts properly  
fastened.  
247  
5-1. Before driving  
Capacity and distribution  
WARNING  
Do not place cargo or luggage  
Cargo capacity depends on the  
total weight of the occupants.  
in or on the following locations.  
• At the feet of the driver  
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load  
capacity) - (Total weight of occu-  
pants)  
• On the front passenger or rear  
seats (when stacking items)  
• On the luggage cover  
• On the instrument panel  
• On the dashboard  
Steps for Determining Correct  
Load Limit   
Secure all items in the occupant  
(1) Locate the statement “The  
combined weight of occupants  
and cargo should never exceed  
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your  
vehicle’s placard.  
compartment.  
NOTICE  
If luggage is loaded on the  
roof (vehicles with solar  
charging system)  
(2) Determine the combined  
weight of the driver and passen-  
gers that will be riding in your  
vehicle.  
Observe the following precau-  
tions. Failure to observe them  
could lead to the solar roof being  
damaged, or the roof rack falling  
off.  
5
(3) Subtract the combined  
weight of the driver and passen-  
gers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
Do not install a roof rack which  
interferes with the solar roof.  
(4) The resulting figure equals  
the available amount of cargo  
and luggage load capacity.  
For example, if the “XXX”  
amount equals 1400 lbs. and  
there will be five 150 lb passen-  
gers in your vehicle, the amount  
of available cargo and luggage  
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 -  
750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)  
Do not load luggage directly  
onto the solar roof.  
(5) Determine the combined  
weight of luggage and cargo  
being loaded on the vehicle.  
That weight may not safely  
exceed the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity calcu-  
lated in Step 4.  
248  
5-1. Before driving  
(6) If your vehicle will be towing  
a trailer, load from your trailer  
will be transferred to your vehi-  
cle. Consult this manual to  
determine how this reduces the  
available cargo and luggage  
load capacity of your vehicle.  
(P.249)  
When 2 people with the com-  
bined weight of A lb. (kg) are rid-  
ing in your vehicle, which has a  
total load capacity (vehicle  
capacity weight) of B lb. (kg),  
the available amount of cargo  
and luggage load capacity will  
be C lb. (kg) as follows:  
B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb.  
(kg)  
Toyota does not recommend  
towing a trailer with your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed for  
trailer towing.  
*1  
:A = Weight of people  
*2  
:B = Total load capacity  
*3  
WARNING  
:C = Available cargo and luggage  
load  
Capacity and distribution  
In this condition, if 3 more passen-  
gers with the combined weight of D  
lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo  
and luggage load will be reduced E  
lb. (kg) as follows:  
Do not exceed the maximum  
axle weight rating or the total  
vehicle weight rating.  
Even if the total load of occu-  
pant’s weight and the cargo  
load is less than the total load  
capacity, do not apply the load  
unevenly. Improper loading may  
cause deterioration of steering  
or braking control which may  
cause death or serious injury.  
C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb.  
(kg)  
*4  
:D = Additional weight of people  
*5  
:E = Available cargo and luggage  
load  
Calculation formula for  
your vehicle  
As shown in the example above,  
if the number of occupants  
increases, the cargo and lug-  
gage load will be reduced by an  
amount that equals the  
increased weight due to the  
additional occupants. In other  
words, if an increase in the num-  
ber of occupants causes an  
excess of the total load capacity  
(combined weight of occupants  
plus cargo and luggage load),  
you must reduce the cargo and  
luggage on your vehicle.  
A
Cargo capacity  
B
Total load capacity (vehicle  
capacity weight) (P.600)  
249  
5-1. Before driving  
Vehicle load limits  
WARNING  
Overloading the vehicle  
Vehicle load limits include  
total load capacity, seating  
capacity, towing capacity  
and cargo capacity.  
Do not overload the vehicle. It  
may not only cause damage to  
the tires, but also degrade steer-  
ing and braking ability, resulting in  
an accident.  
Total load capacity (vehicle  
capacity weight): P.600  
Total load capacity means the  
combined weight of occu-  
pants, cargo and luggage.  
Seating capacity: P.600  
Seating capacity means the  
maximum number of occu-  
pants whose estimated aver-  
age weight is 150 lb. (68 kg)  
per person.  
5
Towing capacity  
Toyota does not recommend  
towing a trailer with your vehi-  
cle.  
Cargo capacity  
Cargo capacity may increase  
or decrease depending on the  
weight and the number of  
occupants.  
Total load capacity and seating  
capacity  
These details are also described on  
the tire and loading information  
label. (P.531)  
250  
Trailer towing  
5-1. Before driving  
Dinghy towing  
Toyota does not recom-  
mend towing a trailer with  
your vehicle. Toyota also  
does not recommend the  
installation of a tow hitch or  
the use of a tow hitch carrier  
for a wheelchair, scooter,  
bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is  
not designed for trailer tow-  
ing or for the use of tow  
hitch mounted carriers.  
Your vehicle is not designed  
to be dinghy towed (with 4  
wheels on the ground)  
behind a motor home.  
NOTICE  
To avoid serious damage to  
your vehicle  
Do not tow your vehicle with 4  
wheels on the ground.  
251  
5-2. Driving procedures  
5-2.Driving procedures  
Continue depressing the brake  
pedal until the “READY” indicator is  
illuminated.  
Pow er (ignition)  
sw it ch  
The hybrid system can be started  
from any power switch mode.  
Performing the following  
operations when carrying  
the electronic key on your  
person starts the hybrid  
system or changes power  
switch modes.  
Starting the hybrid sys-  
tem  
5 Check that the “READY” indi-  
cator is illuminated.  
1 Check that the AC charging  
cable is disconnected.  
(P.116)  
The vehicle cannot be driven if the  
“READY” indicator is off.  
2 Pull the parking brake switch  
to check that the parking  
brake is set. (P.263)  
Power switch illumination  
5
According to the situation, the  
power switch illumination operates  
as follows.  
The parking brake indicator will  
come on.  
When driver’s door or front pas-  
senger’s door is opened, the  
power switch illumination illumi-  
nates.  
3 Firmly depress the brake  
pedal.  
and a message will be dis-  
played on the multi-information dis-  
play.  
If it is not displayed, the hybrid sys-  
tem cannot be started.  
When the power switch is in OFF  
and depressing the brake pedal  
with carrying the electronic key on  
your person, the power switch illu-  
mination blinks.  
When the shift position is N, the  
hybrid system cannot start. Shift  
the shift position to P when starting  
the hybrid system. (P.257)  
4 Press the power switch  
shortly and firmly.  
When the power switch is in ACC  
or ON, the power switch illumina-  
tion illuminates.  
When the power switch mode is  
changed from ACC or ON to OFF,  
the power switch illumination illu-  
minates for a certain amount of  
time. Afterwards, the power switch  
illumination turns off.  
When operating the power switch,  
one short, firm press is enough. It is  
not necessary to press and hold the  
switch.  
If the hybrid system does not  
start  
If the “READY” indicator turns on,  
the hybrid system will operate nor-  
mally.  
The immobilizer system may not  
have been deactivated. (P.70)  
Contact your Toyota dealer.  
252  
5-2. Driving procedures  
If a message related to start-up is  
shown on the multi-information  
display, read the message and fol-  
low the instructions.  
If “Smart Key System malfunc-  
tion See owner’s manual” is  
displayed on the multi-informa-  
tion display  
If the door is unlocked with the  
mechanical key, the hybrid system  
cannot be started using the smart  
key system. Refer to P.588 to start  
the hybrid system. However, if the  
electronic key is carried inside the  
vehicle and the doors are locked  
(P.187), the hybrid system can  
be started.  
The system may be malfunctioning.  
Have the vehicle inspected by your  
Toyota dealer immediately.  
If the “READY” indicator does  
not come on  
In the event that the “READY” indi-  
cator does not come on even after  
performing the proper procedures  
for starting the vehicle, contact your  
Toyota dealer immediately.  
When the ambient temperature  
is low, such as during winter  
driving conditions  
When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-  
played on the multi-information  
display  
When starting the hybrid system,  
the flashing time of the “READY”  
indicator may be long. Leave the  
vehicle as it is until the “READY”  
indicator is steady on, as steady  
means the vehicle is able to move.  
P.281  
If the hybrid system is malfunc-  
tioning  
P.87  
When the hybrid battery (traction  
battery) is extremely cold (below  
approximately -22°F [-30°C])  
under the influence of the outside  
temperature, it may not be possi-  
ble to start the hybrid system. In  
this case, try to start the hybrid  
system again after the tempera-  
ture of the hybrid battery  
Electronic key battery  
P.537  
Operation of the power switch  
If the switch is not pressed shortly  
and firmly, the power switch mode  
may not change or the hybrid sys-  
tem may not start.  
increases due to the outside tem-  
perature increase etc.  
If attempting to restart the hybrid  
system immediately after turning  
the power switch to OFF, the  
hybrid system may not start in  
some cases. After turning the  
power switch to OFF, please wait  
a few seconds before restarting  
the hybrid system.  
Sounds and vibrations specific  
to a Hybrid Electric Vehicle  
P.79  
If the 12-volt battery is dis-  
charged  
The hybrid system cannot be  
started using the smart key system.  
Refer to P.589 to restart the hybrid  
system.  
Customization  
If the smart key system has been  
deactivated in a customized setting,  
refer to P.588.  
Electronic key battery depletion  
P.180  
Conditions affecting operation  
P.205  
Note for the entry function  
P.206  
253  
5-2. Driving procedures  
meter display will be extinguished  
(the shift position indicator will be  
extinguished a few seconds after  
the meter display).  
WARNING  
When starting the hybrid sys-  
tem  
5 Release the brake pedal and  
check that “ACCESSORY” or  
“POWER ON” is not shown  
on the meter.  
Always start the hybrid system  
while sitting in the driver’s seat.  
Do not depress the accelerator  
pedal while starting the hybrid  
system under any circumstances.  
Doing so may cause an accident  
resulting in death or serious  
injury.  
When the shift control system  
malfunctions  
If the shift control system is malfunc-  
tioning, when attempting to turn the  
power switch off, it may not be able  
to be turned off. In this situation, it  
may be possible to turn the power  
switch off by applying the parking  
brake and then operating the power  
switch.  
NOTICE  
When starting the hybrid sys-  
tem  
If the hybrid system becomes diffi-  
cult to start, have your vehicle  
checked by your Toyota dealer  
immediately.  
If there is a malfunction in the sys-  
tem, have the vehicle inspected by  
your Toyota dealer immediately.  
Symptoms indicating a mal-  
function with the power  
switch  
5
Automatic hybrid system shut  
off feature  
If the power switch seems to be  
operating somewhat differently  
than usual, such as the switch  
sticking slightly, there may be a  
malfunction. Contact your Toyota  
dealer immediately.  
The vehicle is equipped with a  
feature that automatically shuts off  
the hybrid system when the shift  
position is in P with the hybrid sys-  
tem operating for an extended  
period.  
The hybrid system will automati-  
cally shut off after approximately 1  
hour if it has been left operating  
while the shift position is in P.  
Stopping the hybrid sys-  
tem  
1 Stop the vehicle completely.  
The timer for the automatic hybrid  
system shut off feature will reset if  
the brake pedal is depressed or if  
the shift position is in a position  
other than P.  
2 If the parking brake is in man-  
ual mode, set the parking  
brake. (P.263)  
After the vehicle is parked, if the  
door is locked with the door lock  
switch (P.187) from the inside  
or the mechanical key (P.587)  
from the outside, the automatic  
hybrid system shut off feature will  
be disabled. The timer for the  
automatic hybrid system shut off  
feature will be re-enabled if the  
driver’s door is opened.  
3 Press the P position switch.  
(P.257)  
Check that the shift position indica-  
tor shows P and the parking brake  
indicator is illuminated.  
4 Press the power switch.  
The hybrid system will stop, and the  
254  
5-2. Driving procedures  
WARNING  
When parking  
Exhaust gases include harmful  
carbon monoxide (CO), which is  
colorless and odorless. Observe  
the following precautions.  
Stopping the hybrid system  
in an emergency  
If you want to stop the hybrid  
system in an emergency while  
driving the vehicle, press and  
hold the power switch for more  
than 2 seconds, or press it  
briefly 3 times or more in suc-  
cession. (P.547)  
Failure to do so may cause  
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle  
and may lead to an accident  
caused by light-headedness, or  
may lead to death or a serious  
health hazard.  
However, do not touch the  
power switch while driving  
except in an emergency. Turn-  
ing the hybrid system off while  
driving will not cause loss of  
steering or braking control.  
However, power assist for the  
steering wheel may be lost mak-  
ing it difficult to steer smoothly  
before stopping the vehicle  
depending on the remaining  
charge in the 12-volt battery or  
usage conditions. In this situa-  
tion, you should pull over and  
stop the vehicle as soon as it is  
safe to do so.  
If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-  
lated area or a closed area,  
such as a garage, stop the  
hybrid system.  
Do not leave the vehicle with  
the hybrid system operating for  
a long time. If such a situation  
cannot be avoided, park the  
vehicle in an open space and  
ensure that exhaust fumes do  
not enter the vehicle interior.  
Do not leave the hybrid system  
operating in an area with snow  
build-up, or where it is snowing.  
If snowbanks build up around  
the vehicle while the hybrid sys-  
tem is operating, exhaust gases  
may collect and enter the vehi-  
cle.  
If the power switch is operated  
while the vehicle is running, a  
warning message will be shown  
on the multi-information display  
and a buzzer sounds.  
When restarting the hybrid sys-  
tem after an emergency shut-  
down, shift the shift position to  
N and press the power switch  
shortly and firmly.  
Changing power switch  
modes  
Modes can be changed by  
pressing the power switch with  
the brake pedal released. (The  
mode changes each time the  
switch is pressed.)  
255  
5-2. Driving procedures  
voice guidance will be given.  
(vehicles with safe exit assist)  
Auto power off function  
If the vehicle is left in ACC or ON  
(the hybrid system is not operat-  
ing) for more than 20 minutes with  
the shift position in P, the power  
switch will automatically turn to  
OFF.  
If the 12-volt battery is low with the  
shift position is in P and the power  
switch is in ACC or ON (the hybrid  
system is not operating), a buzzer  
sounds and a message will be dis-  
played on the multi-information  
display. If this continues, the  
power switch is automatically turn  
to OFF.  
A
B
“ACCESSORY”  
“POWER ON”  
However, this function cannot  
1 OFF  
The emergency flashers can be  
used.  
2 ACC*  
entirely prevent the 12-volt battery  
discharge. Do not leave the vehicle  
with the power switch in ACC or ON  
for long periods of time when the  
hybrid system is not operating.  
5
Some electrical components such  
as the audio system can be used.  
NOTICE  
To prevent 12-volt battery dis-  
charge  
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed  
on the meter.  
Do not leave the power switch  
in ACC or ON for long periods of  
time without the hybrid system  
on.  
3 ON  
All electrical components can be  
used.  
“POWER ON” will be displayed on  
the meter.  
If “ACCESSORY” or “POWER  
ON” is displayed on the meter,  
the power switch is not in OFF.  
Exit the vehicle after turning the  
power switch to OFF.  
*
: ACC mode can be enabled/dis-  
abled on the customize menu.  
(P.625)  
When ACC customization is in  
off  
With the power switch is turned  
off, the multimedia system can still  
be used for a certain time until the  
battery saving function starts  
operating.  
When the safe exit assist is oper-  
ating, a buzzer will sound and a  
256  
Transmission  
5-2. Driving procedures  
If a message about a shift oper-  
ation is shown  
To prevent the shift position from  
being selected incorrectly or the  
vehicle from moving unexpectedly,  
the shift position may be changed  
automatically or operating the shift  
lever may be required. In this case,  
change the shift position following  
the messages on the multi-informa-  
tion display.  
Select the shift position  
depending on your purpose  
and situation.  
Shift position purpose  
and functions  
Restraining sudden start (Drive-  
Start Control)  
Shift posi-  
Objective or function  
tion  
P.245  
Parking the vehi-  
cle/starting the hybrid  
system  
WARNING  
P
R
When driving on slippery  
road surfaces  
Reversing  
Do not accelerate or shift the shift  
position suddenly.  
Sudden changes in engine brak-  
ing may cause the vehicle to spin  
or skid, resulting in an accident.  
Neutral  
(Condition in which the  
power is not transmit-  
ted)  
N
D
*
NOTICE  
Normal driving  
Hybrid battery (traction bat-  
Applying engine brak-  
ing or strong braking  
when the accelerator  
pedal has been  
released on steep  
downward slopes etc.  
tery) charge  
If the shift position is in N, the  
hybrid battery (traction battery)  
will not be charged. To help pre-  
vent the battery from discharging,  
avoid leaving the N position  
selected for an extended period of  
time.  
B
*
: To improve fuel efficiency and  
reduce noise, set the shift posi-  
tion in D for normal driving.  
Situations where shift con-  
trol system malfunctions are  
possible  
When driving with dynamic  
If any of the following situations  
occurs, shift control system mal-  
functions are possible.  
Immediately stop the vehicle in a  
safe place on level ground, apply  
the parking brake, and then con-  
tact your Toyota dealer.  
radar cruise control activated  
Even when switching the driving  
mode to sport mode with the intent  
of enabling engine braking, engine  
braking will not activate because  
dynamic radar cruise control will not  
be canceled.  
257  
5-2. Driving procedures  
the shift position is in D.  
NOTICE  
When shifting from P to N, D or R,  
from N, D, B or R to P, from D or B  
to R, or from R to D, ensure that the  
brake pedal is being depressed and  
the vehicle is stationary.  
When the warning message  
indicating the shift control sys-  
tem appears on the multi-infor-  
mation display. (P.566)  
The display indicates that no  
shift position is selected for  
more than a few seconds.  
B
Shift position indicator  
Meter display:  
The current shift position is illumi-  
nated.  
Shift position display and  
how to change the shift  
position  
Shift lever display:  
The current shift position is illumi-  
nated.  
When selecting the shift position,  
make sure that the shift position  
has been changed to the desired  
position by checking the shift posi-  
tion indicator provided on the  
instrument cluster.  
5
C
P position switch  
Fully stop the vehicle and set the  
parking brake, and then press the P  
position switch.  
When the shift position is changed  
to P, the switch illuminates.  
Check that the shift position indica-  
tor shows P.  
Changing the shift position in  
each power switch mode  
The shift position cannot be  
changed when the power switch is  
in ACC or off.  
A
Shift lever  
Operate the shift lever gently and  
securely in the direction of the  
arrow on the shift position indicator.  
When the power switch is in ON, if  
the READY indicator is not illumi-  
nated, the shift position can only  
be changed to N.  
To shift to N, slide the shift lever in  
the direction of the arrow and hold  
it.  
When the READY indicator is illu-  
minated, the shift position can be  
changed from P to D, N, or R.  
Release the shift lever after each  
shifting operation to allow it to  
When the READY indicator is  
flashing, the shift position cannot  
be changed from P to any other  
return to its regular position ( ).  
Shifting to B is only possible when  
258  
5-2. Driving procedures  
position, even if the shift lever is  
operated. Operate the shift lever  
again after the READY indicator  
changes from flashing to illumi-  
nated.  
speed, the shift position may  
change to P.  
The shift position automatically  
changes to N when  
In the following situations, a buzzer  
will sound to inform you that the shift  
position has been changed to N.  
Use the appropriate operation to  
attempt to change the shift position  
again.  
Shifting the shift position from  
P to other positions  
While depressing the brake pedal  
firmly, operate the shift lever. If the  
shift lever is operated without  
depressing the brake pedal, the  
buzzer will sound and the shifting  
operation will be disabled.  
When attempting to change the  
shift position to R while the vehicle  
is moving forward  
When selecting the shift position,  
make sure that the shift position  
has been changed to the desired  
position by checking the shift posi-  
tion indicator provided on the  
instrument cluster.  
When driving at a low speed, the  
shift position may change to R.  
When attempting to change the  
shift position to D while the vehicle  
is moving backward  
The shift position cannot be  
changed from P to B directly.  
When driving at a low speed, the  
shift position may change to D.  
The shift position cannot be  
changed when  
When attempting to change the  
shift position from R to B  
In the following situations, a buzzer  
will sound to inform you that the shift  
position cannot be changed. Use  
the appropriate operation to attempt  
to change the shift position again.  
If the N shift position is selected  
while driving  
If the shift lever is moved to N while  
driving above a certain speed, the  
shift position will change to N with-  
out holding the shift lever in the N  
position. In this situation, a buzzer  
will sound and a message will be  
displayed on the multi-information  
display to inform you that the shift  
position has been changed to N.  
When attempting to change the  
shift position from P with the brake  
pedal not depressed  
When attempting to change the  
shift position from P with the  
accelerator pedal depressed  
When attempting to change the  
shift position from N while stopped  
or driving at an extremely low  
speed with the brake pedal not  
depressed  
Automatic P position selection  
function  
In the following situations, the shift  
position is automatically changed to  
P.  
When attempting to change the  
shift position from N while stopped  
or driving at an extremely low  
speed with the accelerator pedal  
depressed  
When pressing the power switch  
with the vehicle stopped while the  
power switch is in ON and the shift  
position is in a position other than  
P (after the shift position has  
When attempting to change the  
shift position from P or N to B  
changed to P, the power switch  
*
will turn off)  
When the P position switch is  
pressed while driving  
If the driver’s door is opened and  
all of the following conditions are  
When driving at an extremely low  
259  
5-2. Driving procedures  
met, while the shift position is in a  
position other than P  
In order to prevent the shift  
position from accidentally being  
changed, do not touch the shift  
lever when not using them.  
• The power switch is in ON.  
• The driver is not wearing the seat  
belt.  
• The brake pedal is not depressed.  
P position switch  
To start off the vehicle after the shift  
position is changed to P, operate  
the shift lever again.  
Do not press the P position  
switch while the vehicle is mov-  
ing.  
If the P position switch is pressed  
when driving at very low speeds  
(for example, directly before stop-  
ping the vehicle), the vehicle may  
stop suddenly when the shift posi-  
tion switches to P, which could  
lead to an accident.  
When the vehicle is stopped after  
the hybrid system has been  
stopped in an emergency while  
driving.  
When voltage of the 12-volt bat-  
tery drops while the shift position  
is in a position other than P.  
*
: When the power switch is pressed  
In order to prevent the shift  
position from accidentally being  
changed, do not touch the P  
position switch when not using  
them.  
while driving at extremely slow  
speeds, such as immediately  
before stopping the vehicle, the  
shift position may automatically  
change to P. Make sure that the  
vehicle is completely stopped  
before pressing the power switch.  
5
NOTICE  
When exiting the vehicle  
(driver’s seat only)  
If the shift position cannot be  
shifted from P  
Check that the shift position indi-  
cator shows P and that the park-  
ing brake indicator is illuminated  
before opening the door and exit-  
ing the vehicle.  
There is a possibility that the 12-volt  
battery is discharged. Check the 12-  
volt battery in this situation.  
(P.589)  
Customization  
Some functions can be customized.  
Keeping the shift position  
in N without activating the  
automatic P position  
selection function  
(P.618)  
WARNING  
For the shift lever  
Do not remove the shift lever  
knob or use anything but a gen-  
uine Toyota shift lever knob.  
Also, do not hang anything on  
the shift lever. Doing so could  
prevent the shift lever from  
returning to position, causing  
unexpected accidents to occur  
when the vehicle is in motion.  
By performing the following  
operation, the shift position  
can be held in N until the shift  
position switches to P without  
activating the automatic P  
position selection function.  
260  
5-2. Driving procedures  
1 Operate the shift lever and  
change the shift position to N  
when the hybrid system is  
operating.  
Regeneration Boost  
When the shift position is shifted  
to B, the Regeneration Boost  
operates and control of acceler-  
ation and deceleration is per-  
formed with the operation of the  
accelerator pedal only, reduc-  
ing the frequency of changing  
from the accelerator pedal to  
depress the brake pedal. The  
deceleration when the accelera-  
tor pedal is released can be  
selected, and smooth decelera-  
tion is enabled by releasing the  
accelerator pedal slowly without  
completely removing your foot.  
2 Return the shift lever to its  
regular position ( ).  
3 Operate the shift lever to N  
and hold it there until the  
buzzer sounds.  
4 Press the power switch within  
5 seconds after the buzzer  
sounds.  
The hybrid system stops with the  
*
shift position in N.  
Make sure to check that the buzzer  
sounds and “Holding N Push P  
Switch When Done” is displayed on  
the multi-information display.  
Changing Regeneration  
Boost settings  
In order to shift to a position  
other than N, first press the P  
position switch to change the  
shift position to P.  
Regenerative braking force can  
be changed when the Regener-  
ation Boost is operating by  
selecting “  
Vehicle Settings”  
If the automatic P position  
selection function is operated  
with the hybrid system  
stopped, the automatic P  
position selection function  
may not operate.  
from on the multi-information  
display and selecting “Regener-  
ative Brake”. In addition, the  
regenerative braking force that  
was set can be stored by switch-  
ing “Deceleration Memory” to  
“ON”. (P.166)  
Always perform the operation  
with the hybrid system  
started.  
If “Deceleration Memory” is  
switched to “OFF”, the regenerative  
braking force will return to “Low”  
whenever the power switch is  
turned to ON.  
*
: To keep this state, do not operate  
the power switch. If the power  
switch is operated repeatedly, the  
power switch will turn off after the  
shift position has automatically  
changed to P.  
Regenerative braking force  
settings display  
When the shift position is shifted  
to B, the regenerative braking  
261  
5-2. Driving procedures  
• When the temperature of the elec-  
tric motor (traction motor) or  
power control unit is extremely  
high  
• When Regeneration Boost is con-  
tinually used  
A
force  
that was set is dis-  
played on the shift position indi-  
cator in the meter.  
Regenerative braking  
The vehicle cannot be stopped by  
just releasing the accelerator  
pedal. Step on the brake pedal to  
stop the vehicle.  
The maximum deceleration varies  
depending on the vehicle speed.  
Stop lights  
When the regenerative braking  
force exceeds a certain level, the  
stop lights turn on.  
1 Low  
2 Medium  
3 High  
Customization  
The regenerative braking force  
when the Regeneration Boost is  
operating etc. can be changed.  
(Customizable features: P.618)  
When the regenerative braking  
force that was set does not dis-  
play on the shift position indica-  
tor in the meter even if the shift  
position is shifted to B, the brake  
system or hybrid system may be  
malfunctioning. Perform the cor-  
rection procedure following the  
message displayed on the multi-  
information display. (P.568)  
5
Selecting the driving  
mode  
P.422  
When Regeneration Boost can-  
not be used  
In the following cases, the system  
will not operate.  
• When the brake system or hybrid  
system is malfunctioning  
• When regenerative braking is lim-  
ited  
Regenerative braking may be  
restricted in the following situa-  
tions.  
• When the amount of charge of the  
hybrid battery (traction battery) is  
high  
• When the temperature of the  
hybrid battery (traction battery) is  
low or extremely high  
262  
Turn signal lever  
5-2. Driving procedures  
If the turn signals stop flashing  
before a lane change has been  
performed  
Operate the lever again.  
Operating instructions  
To discontinue flashing of the  
turn signals during a lane  
change  
Operate the lever in the opposite  
direction.  
1 Right turn  
2 Lane change to the right  
(move the lever partway and  
release it)  
The right hand signals will flash 3  
times.  
3 Lane change to the left  
(move the lever partway and  
release it)  
The left hand signals will flash 3  
times.  
4 Left turn  
Turn signals can be operated  
when  
The power switch is in ON.  
If the indicator flashes faster  
than usual  
Have the vehicle inspected by your  
Toyota dealer.  
263  
5-2. Driving procedures  
Pull and hold the parking brake  
Parking brake  
switch if an emergency occurs and  
it is necessary to operate the park-  
ing brake while driving.  
The parking brake can be  
set or released automati-  
cally or manually. In auto-  
matic mode, the parking  
brake can be set or released  
automatically according to  
shift position operation.  
Also, even in automatic  
mode, the parking brake can  
be set or released manually.  
2 Press the switch to release  
the parking brake.  
• Operate the parking brake switch  
while depressing the brake pedal.  
• Using the parking brake auto-  
matic release function, the park-  
ing brake can be released by  
depressing the accelerator pedal.  
When using this function, slowly  
depress the accelerator pedal.  
(P.264)  
Make sure that the parking brake  
indicator light turns off.  
Operating instructions  
Using the manual mode  
If the parking brake indicator  
light flashes, operate the switch  
again. (P.561)  
The parking brake can be set  
and released manually.  
5
Turning the automatic  
mode on  
While the vehicle is stopped,  
pull and hold the parking brake  
switch until a buzzer sounds and  
a message is shown on the  
multi-information display.  
A
Parking brake indicator light  
(for U.S.A.)  
B
Parking brake indicator light  
(for Canada)  
When the automatic mode is  
turned on, the parking brake  
operates as follows.  
1 Pull the switch to set the  
parking brake.  
The parking brake indicator light  
will turn on.  
When the shift position is  
264  
5-2. Driving procedures  
ON, the parking brake cannot be  
released using the parking brake  
switch.  
shifted from P, the parking  
brake will be released, and  
the parking brake indicator  
light will turn off.  
When the power switch is not in  
ON, automatic mode (automatic  
brake setting and releasing) is not  
available.  
When the shift position is  
shifted to P, the parking brake  
will be set, and the parking  
brake indicator light will turn  
on.  
Parking brake automatic  
release function  
When all of the following conditions  
are met, the parking brake can be  
released by depressing the acceler-  
ator pedal.  
Operate the shift position and P  
position switch with the vehicle  
stopped and the brake pedal  
depressed.  
The driver’s door is closed  
The driver is wearing the seat belt  
The shift position is in a forward  
driving position or reverse driving  
position  
The auto function may not operate  
if the shift lever is moved extremely  
quickly or the brake pedal is not  
firmly depressed. In this situation,  
apply the parking brake manually.  
(P.263)  
The malfunction indicator lamp or  
brake system warning light is not  
illuminated.  
When depressing the accelerator  
pedal, depress it slowly.  
Turning the automatic  
mode off  
If the parking brake is not released  
when the accelerator pedal is  
depressed, release the parking  
brake manually.  
While the vehicle is stopped and  
depressing the brake pedal,  
press and hold the parking  
brake switch until a buzzer  
sounds and a message is  
shown on the multi-information  
display.  
When the shift position is shifted  
from P, the parking brake will be  
released automatically.  
Parking brake automatic lock  
function  
The parking brake will be set auto-  
matically under the following condi-  
tions:  
The brake pedal is not depressed  
The driver’s door is open  
The driver’s seat belt is not fas-  
tened  
The shift position is in a position  
other than P or N  
(Vehicles with Advanced Park: The  
shift position is in P during  
advanced park operation.)  
Parking brake operation  
When the power switch is not in  
265  
5-2. Driving procedures  
The malfunction indicator lamp  
and brake system warning light  
are not illuminated  
Parking the vehicle  
P.239  
Parking brake engaged warning  
buzzer  
If “Parking Brake Temporarily  
Unavailable” is displayed on  
the multi-information display  
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is  
driven with the parking brake  
engaged.  
“Parking Brake ON” is displayed on  
the multi-information display (with  
the vehicle reaching a speed of 3  
mph [5 km/h]).  
If the parking brake is operated  
repeatedly over a short period of  
time, the system may restrict opera-  
tion to prevent overheating. If this  
happens, refrain from operating the  
parking brake. Normal operation will  
return after about 1 minute.  
If the brake system warning  
light comes on  
If “Parking Brake Unavailable”  
is displayed on the multi-infor-  
mation display  
P.555  
Usage in winter time  
P.430  
Operate the parking brake switch. If  
the message does not disappear  
after operating the switch several  
times, the system may be malfunc-  
tioning. Have the vehicle inspected  
by your Toyota dealer.  
WARNING  
When parking the vehicle  
Do not leave a child in the vehicle  
alone. The parking brake may be  
released unintentionally by a child  
and there is the danger of the  
vehicle moving that may lead to  
an accident resulting in death or  
serious injury.  
5
Parking brake operation sound  
When the parking brake operates, a  
motor sound (whirring sound) may  
be heard.  
This does not indicate a malfunc-  
tion.  
Parking brake indicator light  
Parking brake switch  
Depending on the power switch  
mode, the parking brake indicator  
light will turn on and stay on as  
described below:  
Do not set any objects near the  
parking brake switch. Objects  
may interfere with the switch and  
may lead the parking brake to  
unexpectedly operate.  
ON: Comes on until the parking  
brake is released.  
Not in ON: Stays on for approxi-  
mately 15 seconds.  
Parking brake automatic lock  
function  
When the power switch is turned  
off with the parking brake set, the  
parking brake indicator light will  
stay on for about 15 seconds. This  
does not indicate a malfunction.  
Never use the automatic parking  
brake engagement function in  
place of normal parking brake  
operation. This function is  
designed to reduce the risk of a  
collision due to the driver forget-  
ting to engage the parking brake.  
Over-reliance on this function to  
park the vehicle safely may lead  
to an accident resulting in death  
or serious injury.  
When the parking brake switch  
malfunctions  
Automatic mode (automatic brake  
setting and releasing) will be turned  
on automatically.  
266  
5-2. Driving procedures  
Brake Hold  
NOTICE  
When parking the vehicle  
The brake hold system  
keeps the brake applied  
when the shift position is in  
D or N with the system on  
and the brake pedal has  
been depressed to stop the  
vehicle. The system  
Before you leave the vehicle, shift  
the shift position to P, set the  
parking brake and make sure that  
the vehicle does not move.  
When the system malfunc-  
tions  
Stop the vehicle in a safe place  
and check the warning messages.  
releases the brake when the  
accelerator pedal is  
When the vehicle 12-volt bat-  
tery is discharged  
depressed with the shift  
position in D to allow  
The parking brake system cannot  
be activated. (P.589)  
smooth start off.  
When the parking brake can-  
not be released due to a mal-  
function  
Enabling the system  
Driving the vehicle with the park-  
ing brake set will lead to brake  
components overheating, which  
may affect braking performance  
and increase brake wear. Have  
the vehicle inspected by your  
Toyota dealer immediately if this  
occurs.  
Turn the brake hold system on  
The brake hold standby indicator  
A
(green)  
comes on. While the  
system is holding the brake, the  
brake hold operated indicator (yel-  
B
low)  
comes on.  
Brake hold system operating  
conditions  
The brake hold system cannot be  
turned on in the following condi-  
tions:  
The driver’s door is not closed.  
The driver is not wearing the seat  
belt.  
267  
5-2. Driving procedures  
“Parking Brake Unavailable” or  
“Parking Brake Malfunction Visit  
Your Dealer” is displayed on the  
multi-information display.  
tions to release the parking brake.  
Depress the accelerator pedal.  
(The parking brake will not be  
released automatically if the seat  
belt is not fastened.)  
If any of the conditions above are  
detected when the brake hold sys-  
tem is enabled, the system will turn  
off and the brake hold standby indi-  
cator light will go off. In addition, if  
any of the conditions are detected  
while the system is holding the  
brake, a warning buzzer will sound  
and a message will be shown on the  
multi-information display. The park-  
ing brake will then be set automati-  
cally.  
Operate the parking brake switch  
with the brake pedal depressed.  
Make sure that the parking brake  
indicator light goes off. (P.263)  
When an inspection at your  
Toyota dealer is necessary  
When the brake hold standby indi-  
cator (green) does not illuminate  
even when the brake hold switch is  
pressed with the brake hold system  
operating conditions met, the sys-  
tem may be malfunctioning. Have  
the vehicle inspected at your Toyota  
dealer.  
Brake hold function  
If the brake pedal is left released  
for a period of about 3 minutes  
after the system has started hold-  
ing the brake, the parking brake  
will be set automatically. In this  
case, a warning buzzer sounds  
and a message is shown on the  
multi-information display.  
If “Brake Hold Malfunction  
Press Brake to Deactivate Visit  
Your Dealer” or “Brake Hold  
Malfunction Visit Your Dealer”  
is displayed on the multi-infor-  
mation display  
5
To turn the system off while the  
system is holding the brake, firmly  
depress the brake pedal and  
press the button again.  
The system may be malfunctioning.  
Have the vehicle inspected by your  
Toyota dealer.  
The brake hold function may not  
hold the vehicle when the vehicle  
is on a steep incline. In this situa-  
tion, it may be necessary for the  
driver to apply the brakes. A warn-  
ing buzzer will sound and the  
multi-information display will  
inform the driver of this situation. If  
a warning message is shown on  
the multi-information display, read  
the message and follow the  
Warning messages and buzzers  
Warning messages and buzzers are  
used to indicate a system malfunc-  
tion or to inform the driver of the  
need for caution. If a warning mes-  
sage is shown on the multi-informa-  
tion display, read the message and  
follow the instructions.  
If the brake hold operated indi-  
cator flashes  
instructions.  
P.561  
When do not wish for the parking  
brake to operate automatically,  
press and hold the brake hold  
switch until the standby indicator  
(green) turns off, and then turn the  
power switch off.  
When the parking brake is set  
automatically while the system  
is holding the brakes  
Perform any of the following opera-  
268  
5-2. Driving procedures  
WARNING  
When the vehicle is on a  
steep incline  
Take care when using the brake  
hold system on a steep incline,  
exercise caution. The brake hold  
function may not hold brakes in  
such situations.  
Also, the system may not activate  
depending on the angle of the  
slope.  
When stopped on a slippery  
road  
The system cannot stop the vehi-  
cle when the gripping ability of the  
tires has been exceeded. Do not  
use the system when stopped on  
a slippery road.  
NOTICE  
When parking the vehicle  
The brake hold system is not  
designed for use when parking  
the vehicle for a long period of  
time. Turning the power switch off  
while the system is holding the  
brake may release the brake,  
which would cause the vehicle to  
move. When operating the power  
switch, depress the brake pedal,  
shift the shift position to P and set  
the parking brake.  
269  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
5-3.Operating the lights and wipers  
U.S.A. (type B)  
Headlight sw itch  
The headlights can be oper-  
ated manually or automati-  
cally.  
Turning on the headlights  
Operating the switch  
turns on the lights as follows:  
U.S.A. (type A)  
1
2
The headlights, side  
marker, parking, LED acces-  
sories lamp (if equipped),  
daytime running lights  
5
(P.270) and so on turn on  
and off automatically.  
The side marker, park-  
ing, LED accessories lamp (if  
equipped), tail, license plate,  
instrument panel lights, and  
daytime running lights  
1
2
The daytime running  
lights turn on. (P.270)  
(P.270) turn on.  
3
4
The headlights and all  
lights listed above (except  
daytime running lights) turn  
on.  
The side marker, park-  
ing, tail, license plate, instru-  
ment panel lights, and  
daytime running lights  
(P.270) turn on.  
The daytime running  
lights turn off.  
3
4
The headlights and all  
lights listed above (except  
daytime running lights) turn  
on.  
Off  
270  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
Vehicles with LED accessories  
lamp: The daytime running lights  
illuminate using the same lights as  
the parking lights, and illuminate  
brighter than the parking lights.  
Canada  
To make your vehicle more visible  
to other drivers during daytime  
driving, the daytime running lights  
turn on automatically when all of  
the following conditions are met.  
(The daytime running lights are  
not designed for use at night.)  
• The hybrid system is operating  
• The parking brake is released  
• The headlight switch is in the  
,
*
or  
position  
*
: When the surroundings are bright  
1
2
3
The headlights, side  
The daytime running lights remain  
on after they illuminate, even if the  
parking brake is set again.  
marker, parking, LED acces-  
sories lamp (if equipped),  
daytime running lights  
For the U.S.A.: Daytime running  
lights can be turned off by operat-  
ing the switch.  
(P.270) and so on turn on  
and off automatically.  
Compared to turning on the head-  
lights, the daytime running light  
system offers greater durability  
and consumes less electricity, so  
it can help improve fuel economy.  
The side marker, park-  
ing, LED accessories lamp (if  
equipped), tail, license plate,  
instrument panel lights, and  
daytime running lights  
Headlight control sensor (if  
equipped)  
(P.270) turn on.  
The sensor may not function prop-  
erly if an object is placed on the sen-  
sor, or anything that blocks the  
sensor is affixed to the windshield.  
Doing so interferes with the sensor  
detecting the level of ambient light  
and may cause the automatic head-  
light system to malfunction.  
The headlights and all  
lights listed above (except  
daytime running lights) turn  
on.  
AUTO mode can be used when  
The power switch is in ON.  
Daytime running light system  
Vehicles without LED accessories  
lamp: The daytime running lights  
illuminate using the same lights as  
the low beam headlights, and illu-  
minate dimmer than the low beam  
headlights.  
271  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
Automatic light off system  
Windshield wiper linked head-  
light illumination (if equipped)  
When the headlights are on: The  
lights turn off 30 seconds after the  
power switch is turned to OFF and  
a door is opened and closed. (The  
When driving during daytime with  
the headlight switch is in the  
position, if the windshield wipers are  
used, the headlights will turn on  
automatically after several seconds  
to help enhance the visibility of your  
vehicle.  
lights turn off immediately if  
on the key is pressed after all the  
doors are closed.)  
When only the tail lights are on:  
The tail lights turn off automati-  
cally if the power switch is turned  
to OFF and the driver’s door is  
opened.  
If “Headlight System Malfunc-  
tion Visit Your Dealer” is dis-  
played on the multi-information  
display  
To turn the lights on again, turn the  
power switch to ON, or turn the light  
The system may be malfunctioning.  
Have the vehicle inspected by your  
Toyota dealer.  
switch to the  
tion once and then back to the  
or position.  
,
or  
posi-  
Customization  
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitiv-  
ity) can be changed.  
(Customizable features: P.618)  
5
Light reminder buzzer  
A buzzer sounds when the driver’s  
door is opened while the lights are  
turned on with the power switch in  
OFF (except when the automatic  
light off system is operated).  
NOTICE  
To prevent 12-volt battery dis-  
charge  
Do not leave the lights on longer  
than necessary when the hybrid  
system is not operating.  
12-volt battery-saving function  
In order to prevent the 12-volt bat-  
tery of the vehicle from discharging,  
if the headlights and/or tail lights are  
on when the power switch is turned  
to OFF, the battery saving function  
will operate and automatically turn  
off all the lights after approximately  
20 minutes.  
Turning on the high beam  
headlights  
When any of the following are per-  
formed, the 12-volt battery-saving  
function is canceled once and then  
reactivated. All the lights will turn off  
automatically 20 minutes after the  
12-volt battery-saving function has  
been reactivated:  
When the headlight switch is oper-  
ated  
1 With the headlights on, push  
the lever away from you to  
turn on the high beams.  
When a door is opened or closed  
272  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
Pull the lever toward you to the  
center position to turn the high  
beams off.  
AHB (Automatic High  
Beam)  
2 Pull the lever toward you and  
release it to flash the high  
beams once.  
You can flash the high beams with  
the headlights on or off.  
The Automatic High Beam  
uses a front camera located  
on the upper portion of the  
windshield to detect the  
brightness of the lights of  
vehicles ahead, street-  
lights, etc., and automati-  
cally changes the head  
lights between the high  
beams and low beams.  
WARNING  
For safe use  
Do not overly rely on the Auto-  
matic High Beam. Always drive  
safely, taking care to observe  
your surroundings and turning the  
high beams on or off manually if  
necessary.  
To prevent unintentional  
operation of the Automatic  
High Beam system  
When it is necessary to disable  
the system: P.284  
Using the Automatic High  
Beam system  
1 Press the Automatic High  
Beam switch.  
273  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
• When vehicles ahead are repeat-  
edly detected and then hidden  
due to repeated curves, road  
dividers or roadside trees  
• When a vehicle ahead  
approaches from a far lane  
• When a vehicle ahead is far away  
• When a vehicle ahead has no  
lights  
2 Turn the headlight switch to  
the or position.  
When the headlight switch lever is  
in the low beam position, the AHB  
system will be enabled and the  
AHB indicator will illuminate.  
• When the lights of a vehicle ahead  
are dim  
• When a vehicle ahead is reflecting  
strong light, such as own head-  
lights  
• Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly: P.289  
The headlights may change to the  
low beams if a vehicle ahead that  
is using fog lights without its head-  
lights turned on is detected.  
Automatic operating condi-  
tions of the high beams  
House lights, street lights, traffic  
signals, and illuminated billboards  
or signs may cause the high  
beams to change to the low  
beams, or the low beams to  
remain on.  
When all of the following condi-  
tions are met, the high beams will  
illuminate automatically:  
• The vehicle speed is approxi-  
mately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.  
• The area ahead of the vehicle is  
dark.  
• There are no vehicles ahead with  
lights on.  
• There are few streetlights or other  
lights on the road ahead.  
5
The following may change the tim-  
ing at which the headlights  
change to the low beams:  
• The brightness of lights of vehi-  
cles ahead  
• The movement and direction of  
vehicles ahead  
If any of the following conditions  
are met, the headlights will  
change to the low beams:  
• Vehicle speed drops below  
approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).  
• The area ahead of the vehicle is  
not dark.  
• There is a vehicle ahead with  
lights on.  
• There are many streetlights or  
other lights on the road ahead.  
• The distance between the vehicle  
and a vehicle ahead  
• When a vehicle ahead only has  
lights illuminated on one side  
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-  
wheeled vehicle  
• The condition of the road (gradi-  
ent, curve, condition of the road  
surface, etc.)  
• The number of passengers and  
amount of luggage  
Front camera detection  
The headlights may change  
between the high beams and low  
beams unexpectedly.  
In the following situations, the high  
beams may not be automatically  
changed to the low beams:  
• When a vehicle cuts in front of  
your vehicle  
Bicycles and other small vehicles  
may not be detected.  
In the following situations, the sys-  
tem may not be able to correctly  
detect the brightness of the sur-  
• When another vehicle crosses in  
front of the vehicle  
274  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
roundings. This may cause the  
low beams to remain on or the  
high beams to flash or dazzle  
pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In  
such a case, it is necessary to  
manually change between the  
high beams and low beams.  
• When there are lights similar to  
headlights or tail lights in the sur-  
rounding area  
position quickly 10 times, then  
leave the lever in its original  
position.  
4 If the sensitivity is changed, the  
Automatic High Beam indicator  
will blink 3 times.  
Turning the high beams  
on/off manually  
• When headlights or tail lights of  
vehicles ahead are turned off,  
dirty, changing color, or not aimed  
properly  
Changing to the high  
beams  
• When the headlights are repeat-  
edly changing between the high  
beams and low beams.  
Push the lever forward.  
The AHB indicator will turn off and  
the headlight high beam indicator  
will turn on.  
• When use of the high beams is  
inappropriate or when the high  
beams may be flashing or daz-  
zling pedestrians or other drivers.  
• When the vehicle is used in an  
area in which vehicles travel on  
the opposite side of the road of  
the country for which the vehicle  
was designed, for example using  
a vehicle designed for right-hand  
traffic in a left-hand traffic area, or  
vice versa  
Pull the lever to its original position  
to enable the Automatic High Beam  
system again.  
• When it is necessary to disable  
the system: P.284  
• Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly: P.289  
Temporarily reducing front  
camera sensitivity  
The sensitivity of the front camera  
can be temporarily reduced.  
1 Turn the power switch off with  
Changing to the low beams  
Press the Automatic High Beam  
switch.  
the following conditions met.  
The AHB indicator will turn off.  
The headlight switch is in the  
Press the switch to enable the  
Automatic High Beam system  
again.  
or  
position.  
The headlight switch lever is in the  
low beam position.  
The automatic High Beam switch  
is on.  
2 Turn the power switch to ON.  
3 Within 60 seconds after perform-  
ing step 2, push the headlight  
switch lever to the high beam  
position then pull it to the original  
275  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
Windshield wipers and  
washer  
Operating the lever can use  
the windshield wipers or the  
washer.  
NOTICE  
When the windshield is dry  
Temporarily changing to  
the low beams  
Do not use the wipers, as they  
may damage the windshield.  
It is recommended to switch to  
the low beams when use of the  
high beams is inappropriate or  
when the high beams may  
cause problems or distress to  
other drivers or pedestrians  
nearby.  
Operating the wiper lever  
Operating the  
lever oper-  
ates the wipers or washer as fol-  
lows:  
5
Pull the lever rearward and then  
return it to its original position.  
The high beams will illuminate  
while the lever is pulled, however,  
after the lever is returned to its orig-  
inal position, the low beams will  
remain on for a certain amount of  
time. After this, the Automatic High  
Beam system will operate.  
*2  
1
2
3
4
*1 or  
Off  
Rain-sensing operation  
*2  
*1 or  
Low speed operation  
*2  
*1 or  
High speed operation  
276  
5
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
*2  
*1 or  
The wipers will automatically oper-  
ate a couple of times after the  
Temporary operation  
washer squirts. (After operating  
several times, the wipers operate  
once more time after a short delay  
to prevent dripping. However, the  
dripping prevention does not oper-  
ate while the vehicle is moving.)  
*1  
*2  
:For the U.S.A.  
:For Canada  
When  
is selected, the  
wipers will operate automatically  
when the sensor detects falling  
rain. The system automatically  
adjusts wiper timing in accor-  
dance with rain volume and  
vehicle speed.  
9
Camera cleaning  
washer operation (if  
equipped)  
Pushing the lever operates the ded-  
icated camera cleaning washer to  
clean the following cameras.  
• The camera for Digital Rear-view  
Mirror (if equipped) (P.221)  
• The camera for rear view monitor  
The sensor sensitivity can be  
adjusted by turning the switch  
ring.  
*
system (if equipped)  
• The rear camera for panoramic  
*
view monitor (if equipped)  
*
: Refer to “MULTIMEDIA  
OWNER’S MANUAL”.  
The windshield wiper and  
washer can be operated when  
The power switch is in ON.  
6 Increases the sensitivity  
7 Decreases the sensitivity  
Using the voice control system  
(if equipped)  
The following operations can be  
performed using the voice control  
system:  
Operating the windshield wipers  
only once  
Operating the windshield clean-  
ing washer (it can be performed  
only when the vehicle is stopped)  
For details regarding the voice con-  
trol system, refer to “MULTIMEDIA  
OWNER’S MANUAL”.  
8
Windshield cleaning  
washer/wiper dual operation  
Effects of vehicle speed on  
wiper operation  
Pulling the lever operates the wip-  
ers and windshield cleaning  
washer.  
With low speed windshield wiper  
operation selected, wiper operation  
will be switched from low speed to  
277  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
intermittent wiper operation when  
the vehicle is stationary. (However,  
when the sensor sensitivity is  
adjusted to the highest level, the  
mode will not switch.)  
shield wipers will be stopped to pre-  
vent anyone near the vehicle from  
being sprayed by water from the  
wipers. When the front door is  
closed, wiper operation will resume.  
Raindrop sensor  
If no windshield washer fluid  
sprays  
The raindrop sensor judges the  
amount of raindrops.  
Check that the washer nozzles are  
not blocked if there is washer fluid in  
the windshield washer fluid reser-  
voir.  
An optical sensor is adopted. It may  
not operate properly when sunlight  
from the rising or setting of the sun  
intermittently strikes the windshield,  
or if bugs, etc. are present on the  
windshield.  
WARNING  
Caution regarding the use of  
windshield wipers in “AUTO”  
mode  
The windshield wipers may oper-  
ate unexpectedly if the sensor is  
touched or the windshield is sub-  
ject to vibration in “AUTO” mode.  
Take care that your fingers or  
anything else do not become  
caught in the windshield wipers.  
5
If the wiper switch is turned to the  
Caution regarding the use of  
windshield cleaning washer  
fluid  
position while the power  
switch is in ON, the wipers will  
operate once to show that “AUTO”  
mode is activated.  
When it is cold, do not use the  
washer fluid until the windshield  
becomes warm. The fluid may  
freeze on the windshield and  
cause low visibility. This may lead  
to an accident, resulting in death  
or serious injury.  
When the sensor sensitivity ring is  
turned toward high while in the  
“AUTO” mode, the wipers will  
operate once to indicate that the  
sensor sensitivity is enhanced.  
If the temperature of the raindrop  
sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher,  
or 5°F (-15°C) or lower, the auto-  
matic operation may not occur. In  
this case, operate the wipers in  
any mode other than “AUTO”.  
NOTICE  
When the washer fluid tank is  
empty  
Do not operate the switch continu-  
ally as the washer fluid pump may  
overheat.  
Front door opening linked wind-  
shield wiper stop function  
When  
is selected and the  
windshield wipers are operating, if a  
front door is opened while the vehi-  
cle is stopped and the P position is  
selected, operation of the wind-  
278  
5-3. Operating the lights and wipers  
NOTICE  
When a nozzle becomes  
blocked  
In this case, contact your Toyota  
dealer.  
Do not try to clear it with a pin or  
other object. The nozzle will be  
damaged.  
To prevent 12-volt battery dis-  
charge  
Do not leave the wipers on longer  
than necessary when the hybrid  
system is off.  
279  
5-4. Refueling  
5-4.Refueling  
After exiting the vehicle and  
Opening the fuel tank  
before opening the fuel door,  
cap  
touch an unpainted metal sur-  
face to discharge any static  
electricity. It is important to dis-  
charge static electricity before  
refueling because sparks result-  
ing from static electricity can  
cause fuel vapors to ignite while  
refueling.  
The fuel tank of your vehicle  
has a special structure,  
which requires a reduction  
in fuel tank pressure before  
refueling. After the opener  
switch has been pressed, it  
will take several seconds  
until the vehicle is ready for  
refueling.  
Always hold the grips on the  
fuel tank cap and turn it slowly  
to remove it.  
A whooshing sound may be  
heard when the fuel tank cap is  
loosened. Wait until the sound  
cannot be heard before fully  
removing the cap. In hot  
weather, pressurized fuel may  
spray out of the filler neck and  
cause injury.  
Before refueling the vehi-  
cle  
Close all the doors and win-  
dows, and turn the power  
switch to OFF.  
Do not allow anyone that has  
not discharged static electricity  
from their body to come close to  
an open fuel tank.  
5
Confirm the type of fuel.  
Do not inhale vaporized fuel.  
Fuel contains substances that  
are harmful if inhaled.  
Fuel types  
P.607  
Do not smoke while refueling  
the vehicle.  
Doing so may cause the fuel to  
ignite and cause a fire.  
Fuel tank opening for unleaded  
gasoline  
To help prevent incorrect fueling,  
your vehicle has a fuel tank opening  
that only accommodates the spe-  
cial nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.  
Do not return to the vehicle or  
touch any person or object that  
is statically charged. This may  
cause static electricity to build  
up, resulting in a possible igni-  
tion hazard.  
WARNING  
When refueling the vehicle  
When refueling  
Observe the following precautions  
while refueling the vehicle. Failure  
to do so may result in death or  
serious injury.  
Observe the following precautions  
to prevent fuel overflowing from  
the fuel tank:  
Securely insert the fuel nozzle  
into the fuel filler neck.  
Stop filling the tank after the fuel  
nozzle automatically clicks off.  
280  
5-4. Refueling  
WARNING  
possible, a message will be shown  
on the multi-information display in  
the instrument cluster to indicate  
the progress of the fuel filler door  
opener.  
Do not top off the fuel tank.  
NOTICE  
Refueling  
Finish refueling within 30 min-  
utes. If more than 30 minutes  
passes, the internal valve  
closes. In this condition, fuel  
may overflow during the refuel-  
ing process. Press the fuel filler  
door opener switch again.  
Make sure that the fuel filler  
door lock is not pushed by the  
fuel nozzle boot, etc. If the lock  
is held, the internal valve closes  
and fuel may overflow. To pre-  
vent it, press the fuel filler door  
opener switch again.  
2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly  
to open and hang it on the  
back of holder on the fuel  
filler door.  
Do not spill fuel during refueling.  
Doing so may damage the vehi-  
cle, such as causing the emis-  
sion control system to operate  
abnormally or damaging fuel  
system components or the vehi-  
cle’s painted surface.  
If the fuel filler door cannot be  
opened  
Consult your Toyota dealer.  
Closing the fuel tank cap  
Notice about fuel  
P.86  
After refueling, turn the fuel tank  
cap until you hear a click. Once  
the cap is released, it will turn  
slightly in the opposite direction.  
Opening the fuel tank cap  
1 Press the opener switch to  
open the fuel filler door.  
The fuel filler door will open within  
about 10 seconds of the switch  
being pressed. Before refueling is  
281  
5-4. Refueling  
When “Check Fuel Cap” is dis-  
played on the multi-information  
display  
The fuel tank cap may be unfas-  
tened or loose. Turn the power  
switch to OFF, check the cap and  
tighten it securely. If the message  
remains, wait a few seconds and  
then turn the power switch to OFF  
once again.  
5
WARNING  
When replacing the fuel tank  
cap  
Do not use anything but a genu-  
ine Toyota fuel tank cap designed  
for your vehicle. Doing so may  
cause a fire or other incident  
which may result in death or seri-  
ous injury.  
282  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
5-5.Using the driving support systems  
If the software of this system  
Toyota Safety Sense  
3.0/Traffic Jam Assist  
software update  
has been updated after initial  
purchase of the vehicle, before  
using this system, be sure to  
read the Owner’s Manual which  
corresponds to the software ver-  
sion of the system.  
It is necessary to enter a  
connected services con-  
tract, provided by Toyota, to  
use these functions. For  
details, contact your Toyota  
dealer.  
Precautions for use  
Be aware that some functions  
may temporarily be disabled if a  
legal or safety related issue  
occurs.  
WARNING  
If a connected services contract  
has not been entered or has  
expired, software updates will not  
be able to be performed wire-  
lessly.  
For safe use  
When the Toyota Safety Sense  
3.0/Traffic Jam Assist software is  
updated, the operating methods  
of functions may change. Using  
this system without knowing the  
correct operating methods may  
lead to an accident resulting in  
death or serious injury.  
Checking your vehicle’s  
Toyota Safety Sense  
3.0/Traffic Jam Assist ver-  
sion  
Make sure to read the Digital  
Owner’s Manual which corre-  
sponds to the software version  
of the system, available at the  
Owner’s Manual website, before  
using this system.  
If the software of this system  
has been updated after initial  
purchase of the vehicle, to  
access the appropriate Owner’s  
Manual, it is necessary to check  
the software version of the sys-  
tem and then visit the Owner’s  
Manual website.  
Content of the Toyota  
Safety Sense 3.0/Traffic  
Jam Assist Owner’s Man-  
ual  
Checking the version using  
This Owner’s Manual contains  
information for Ver.2. For the lat-  
est information about the con-  
trols, use, warnings/precautions,  
etc. of each function of Toyota  
Safety Sense 3.0/Traffic Jam  
Assist, refer to the Digital  
OneApp  
The software version of the sys-  
tem can be checked using One-  
App.  
Owner’s Manual at the Owner’s  
Manual website.  
283  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Selecting your vehicle’s  
Updating the software  
Toyota Safety Sense  
3.0/Traffic Jam Assist ver-  
sion  
If a software update is available,  
a notification will be displayed  
by OneApp. Follow the instruc-  
tions displayed on the screen.  
1 Access the following URL  
using a computer or smart-  
phone:  
Software update precautions  
For U.S.A owners  
After a software update has been  
performed, it will not be possible  
to revert to a previous version.  
https://www.toyota.com/owners/  
resources/warranty-owners-manuals/  
manual?om=om47f48u.priusprime.  
2024.2309.phev.vh  
Depending on the communication  
environment and the content of an  
update, a software update may  
take several hours. Although an  
update will be suspended when  
the power switch is turned off, it  
will resume when the power  
switch is changed back to ON.  
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0/Traffic  
Jam Assist can still be used while  
a software update is being per-  
formed.  
5
What can be checked using the  
OneApp  
For Canadian owners  
The following items can be checked  
or performed.  
https://www.toyota.ca/toyota/  
owners/manual?om=om47f48u.  
priusprime.2024.2309.phev.vh  
Software version, update details,  
precautions, use methods, etc.  
Software update  
2 Select the file which includes  
the previously checked sys-  
tem version.  
284  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
If attention is necessary while  
Toyota Safety Sense  
3.0  
performing driving operations or  
a system malfunction occurs, a  
warning message or warning  
buzzer will be operated. If a  
warning message is displayed  
on the display, follow the  
The Toyota Safety Sense 3.0  
consists of the driving  
assist systems and contrib-  
utes to a safe and comfort-  
able driving experience:  
instructions displayed.  
Depending on external noise,  
the volume of the audio system,  
etc. it may be difficult to hear the  
warning buzzer. Also, depend-  
ing on the road conditions, it  
may be difficult to recognize the  
operation of the system.  
WARNING  
Toyota Safety Sense 3.0  
The Toyota Safety Sense 3.0  
operates under the assumption  
that the driver will drive safely,  
and is designed to help reduce  
the impact to the occupants in a  
collision and assist the driver  
under normal driving conditions.  
When it is necessary to dis-  
able the system  
In the following situations, make  
sure to disable the system.  
Failure to do so may lead to the  
system not operating properly,  
possibly leading to an accident  
resulting in death or serious  
injury.  
As there is a limit to the degree of  
recognition accuracy and control  
performance that this system can  
provide, do not overly rely on this  
system. The driver is solely  
responsible for paying attention to  
the vehicle’s surroundings and  
driving safely.  
When the vehicle is tilted due to  
being overloaded or having a  
flat tire  
When driving at extremely high  
speeds  
For safe use  
Do not overly rely on this sys-  
tem. The driver is solely respon-  
sible for paying attention to the  
vehicle’s surroundings and driv-  
ing safely. This system may not  
operate in all situations and pro-  
vided assistance is limited.  
Over-reliance on this system to  
drive the vehicle safely may  
lead to an accident resulting in  
death or serious injury.  
When towing another vehicle  
When the vehicle is being trans-  
ported by a truck, ship, train,  
etc.  
When the vehicle is raised on a  
lift and the tires are allowed to  
rotate freely  
When inspecting the vehicle  
using a drum tester such as a  
chassis dynamometer or speed-  
ometer tester, or when using an  
on vehicle wheel balancer  
Do not attempt to test the oper-  
ation of the system, as it may  
not operate properly, possibly  
leading to an accident.  
When the vehicle is driven in a  
sporty manner or off-road  
285  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
LCA (Lane Change Assist)*  
WARNING  
P.310  
When using an automatic car  
wash  
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic  
When a sensor is misaligned or  
deformed due to a strong  
impact being applied to the sen-  
sor or the area around the sen-  
sor  
Alert)*  
P.326  
PDA (Proactive Driving  
Assist)  
When accessories which  
obstruct a sensor or light are  
temporarily installed to the vehi-  
cle  
P.320  
RSA (Road Sign Assist)*  
When a compact spare tire or  
tire chains are installed to the  
vehicle or an emergency tire  
puncture repair kit has been  
used  
P.329  
Dynamic radar cruise con-  
trol  
P.331  
When the tires are excessively  
worn or the inflation pressure of  
the tires is low  
Cruise control  
P.342  
5
When tires other than the manu-  
facturer specified size are  
installed  
Emergency Driving Stop  
System  
When the vehicle cannot be  
driven stably, due to a collision,  
malfunction, etc.  
P.345  
Traffic Jam Assist*  
P.348  
Driving assist system  
Driver monitor*  
P.292  
AHB (Automatic High  
Beam)  
*
: If equipped  
P.272  
PCS (Pre-Collision System)  
P.293  
Sensors used by Toyota  
Safety Sense 3.0  
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)  
P.305  
Various sensors are used to  
obtain the necessary informa-  
tion for system operation.  
LDA (Lane Departure Alert)  
P.313  
286  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Driver monitor camera*  
Sensors which detect the  
A
surrounding conditions  
*
: If equipped  
Front  
WARNING  
To prevent malfunction of the  
radar sensors  
Observe the following precau-  
tions.  
Failure to do so may lead to a  
radar sensor not operating prop-  
erly, possibly leading to an acci-  
dent resulting in death or serious  
injury.  
Keep the radar sensors and  
radar sensor covers clean at all  
times.  
A
Front radar sensor  
B
C
Front camera  
Front side radar sensors*  
Clean the front of a radar sensor  
or the front or back of a radar sen-  
sor cover if it is dirty or covered  
with water droplets, snow, etc.  
*
: If equipped  
Rear  
When cleaning the radar sensor  
and radar sensor cover, use a soft  
cloth to remove dirt so as to not  
damage them.  
A
Rear side radar sensors  
Sensors which detect the  
A
Radar sensor  
driver condition  
B
Radar sensor cover  
287  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
To prevent malfunction of the  
front camera  
WARNING  
Vehicles with front side radar  
sensors: Keep the surrounding  
area of the front side radar sen-  
sors on the front bumper clean  
at all times.  
Observe the following precau-  
tions.  
Failure to do so may lead to the  
front camera not operating prop-  
erly, possibly leading to an acci-  
dent resulting in death or serious  
injury.  
Always keep the windshield  
clean.  
• If the windshield is dirty or cov-  
ered with an oily film, water  
droplets, snow, etc., clean the  
windshield.  
Do not attach accessories,  
stickers (including transparent  
stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to  
a radar sensor or radar sensor  
cover and their surrounding  
area.  
• Even if a glass coating agent is  
applied to the windshield, it will  
still be necessary to use the  
windshield wipers to remove  
water droplets, etc. from the  
area of the windshield in front of  
the front camera.  
Do not subject a radar sensor or  
its surrounding area to impact.  
5
If a radar sensor, the front grille,  
or front bumper has been sub-  
jected to a impact, have the vehi-  
cle inspected by your Toyota  
dealer.  
• If the inner side of the wind-  
shield where the front camera is  
installed is dirty, contact your  
Toyota dealer.  
Do not attach stickers (including  
transparent stickers) or other  
items to the area of the wind-  
shield in front of the front cam-  
era (shaded area in the  
Do not disassemble the radar  
sensors.  
Do not modify or paint the radar  
sensors or radar sensor cover,  
or replace them with anything  
other than Toyota genuine  
parts.  
illustration).  
In the following situations, recal-  
ibration of the radar sensors will  
be necessary. For details, con-  
tact your Toyota dealer.  
• When a radar sensor is  
removed and installed, or  
replaced  
A
Approximately 1.6 in. (4 cm)  
B
Approximately 1.6 in. (4 cm)  
• When the front bumper or the  
front grille has been replaced  
288  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Do not disassemble the front  
WARNING  
camera.  
If the part of the windshield in  
front of the front camera is  
fogged up or covered with con-  
densation or ice, use the wind-  
shield defogger to remove the  
fog, condensation, or ice.  
Do not modify any parts around  
the front camera, such as the  
inside rear view mirror or ceil-  
ing.  
Do not attach accessories  
which may obstruct the front  
camera to the hood, front grille,  
or front bumper. For details,  
contact your Toyota dealer.  
If water droplets cannot be  
properly removed from the area  
of the windshield in front of the  
front camera by the windshield  
wipers, replace the wiper insert  
or wiper blade.  
If a surfboard or other long  
object is to be mounted on the  
roof, make sure that it will not  
obstruct the front camera.  
Do not attach window tint to the  
windshield.  
Do not modify or change the  
headlights and other lights.  
Replace the windshield if it is  
damaged or cracked.  
If the windshield has been  
replaced, recalibration of the front  
camera will be necessary. For  
details, contact your Toyota  
dealer.  
Front camera installation area  
on the windshield  
If the system determines that the  
windshield may be fogged up, it  
will automatically operate the  
heater to defog the part of the  
windshield around the front cam-  
era. When cleaning, etc., be care-  
ful not to touch the area around  
the front camera until the wind-  
shield has cooled sufficiently, as  
touching it may cause burns.  
Do not allow liquids to contact  
the front camera.  
Do not allow bright lights to  
shine into the front camera.  
Do not damage the lens of the  
front camera or allow it to  
become dirty.  
Precautions for the driver  
monitor camera (if equipped)  
When cleaning the inside of the  
windshield, do not allow glass  
cleaner to contact the lens of the  
front camera. Do not touch the  
lens of the front camera.  
Observe the following precau-  
tions.  
Failure to do so may lead to mal-  
function of the driver monitor cam-  
era and the systems not operating  
properly, possibly leading to an  
accident resulting in death or seri-  
ous injury.  
If the lens of the front camera is  
dirty or damaged, contact your  
Toyota dealer.  
Do not subject the front camera  
to a strong impact.  
Do not change the position or  
orientation of the front camera  
or remove it.  
289  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
LCA (Lane Change Assist)  
P.310  
WARNING  
Do not subject the driver moni-  
tor camera or its surrounding  
area to strong impact.  
Radar Cruise Control: Extended  
resume time  
P.331  
If subjected to a strong impact,  
the driver monitor camera may  
move out of alignment and the  
driver may no longer be detected  
correctly. In this case, have the  
vehicle inspected by your Toyota  
dealer.  
Traffic Jam Assist  
P.348  
Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly  
When the height or inclination of  
the vehicle has been changed due  
to modifications  
Do not disassemble or modify  
the driver monitor camera.  
When the windshield is dirty,  
fogged up, cracked or damaged  
Do not attach accessories,  
stickers (including transparent  
stickers), etc. to the driver moni-  
tor camera or its surrounding  
area.  
When the ambient temperature is  
high or low  
When mud, water, snow, dead  
insects, foreign matter, etc., is  
attached to the front of the sensor  
Do not allow the driver monitor  
camera or its surrounding area  
to get wet.  
When in inclement weather such  
as heavy rain, fog, snow, or a  
sandstorm  
5
Do not cover the driver monitor  
camera or place anything in  
front of it.  
When water, snow, dust, etc. is  
thrown up in front of the vehicle, or  
when driving through mist or  
smoke  
Keep the lens of the driver mon-  
itor camera free from damage.  
When the headlights are not illu-  
minated while driving in the dark,  
such as at night or when in a tun-  
nel  
Do not touch the lens of the  
driver monitor camera or allow it  
to become dirty.  
When the lens of a headlight is  
dirty and illumination is weak  
When there is dirt or fingerprints  
on the camera lens, clean it with a  
dry, soft cloth so as to not mark or  
damage it.  
When the headlights are mis-  
aligned  
When a headlight is malfunction-  
ing  
When cleaning the lens, do not  
use detergents or organic sol-  
vents that may damage plastic.  
When the headlights of another  
vehicle, sunlight, or reflected light  
shines directly into the front cam-  
era  
Precautions for use  
When the brightness of the sur-  
rounding area changes suddenly  
It is necessary to enter a connected  
services contract, provided by  
Toyota, to use these functions. For  
details, contact your Toyota dealer.  
When driving near a TV tower,  
broadcasting station, electric  
power plant, radar equipped vehi-  
cles, etc., or other location where  
290  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
strong radio waves or electrical  
noise may be present  
tle exposed metal, such as a vehi-  
cle which is partially covered with  
cloth, etc.  
When a wiper blade is blocking  
the front camera  
When a detectable vehicle is  
irregularly shaped, such as a trac-  
tor, sidecar, etc.  
When in a location or near objects  
which strongly reflect radio waves,  
such as the following:  
• Tunnels  
• Truss bridges  
• Gravel roads  
• Rutted, snow-covered roads  
• Walls  
• Large trucks  
• Manhole covers  
• Guardrail  
• Metal plates  
When the distance between the  
vehicle and a detectable vehicle  
has become extremely short  
When a detectable vehicle is at an  
angle  
When snow, mud, etc. is attached  
to a detectable vehicle  
When driving on the following  
kinds of roads:  
• Roads with sharp curves or wind-  
ing roads  
• Roads with changes in grade,  
such as sudden inclines or  
declines  
When near a step or protrusion  
When a detectable vehicle is nar-  
row, such as a small mobility vehi-  
cle  
When a detectable vehicle has a  
small front or rear end, such as an  
unloaded truck  
• Roads which is sloped to the left  
or right  
• Roads with deep ruts  
• Roads which are rough and  
unmaintained  
When a detectable vehicle has a  
low front or rear end, such as a  
low bed trailer  
• Roads which frequently undulate  
or are bumpy  
When the steering wheel is being  
operated frequently or suddenly  
When the vehicle is not in a con-  
stant position within a lane  
When parts related to this system,  
the brakes, etc. are cold or  
extremely hot, wet, etc.  
When the wheels are misaligned  
When a detectable vehicle has  
extremely high ground clearance  
When driving on slick road sur-  
faces, such as when it is covered  
with ice, snow, gravel, etc.  
When the course of the vehicle  
differs from the shape of a curve  
When the vehicle speed is exces-  
sively high when entering a curve  
When entering/exiting a parking  
lot, garage, car elevator, etc.  
When a detectable vehicle is car-  
rying a load which protrudes from  
its cargo area  
When driving in a parking lot  
When driving through an area  
where there are obstructions  
which may contact your vehicle,  
When a detectable vehicle has lit-  
291  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
such as tall grass, tree branches,  
a curtain, etc.  
Situations in which the driver  
monitor may not operate prop-  
erly (if equipped)  
When driving in strong wind  
In situations such as the following,  
the driver monitor camera may not  
be able to detect the driver’s face,  
and the function may not operate  
properly.  
Situations in which the lane  
may not be detected  
When the lane is extremely wide  
or narrow  
Immediately after changing lanes  
or passing through an intersection  
When the inside of the vehicle is  
hot, such as after the vehicle has  
been parked in the sun  
When driving in a temporary lane  
or lane regulated by construction  
When a very bright light, such as  
the sun or the headlights of follow-  
ing vehicle, shines onto the driver  
monitor camera  
When there are structures, pat-  
terns, shadows which are similar  
to lane lines in the surrounding  
When the brightness inside the  
vehicle changes frequently due to  
the shadows of surrounding struc-  
tures, etc.  
When there are multiple white  
lines for a lane line  
When the lane lines are not clear  
or driving on a wet road surface  
When a very bright light, such as  
the sun or the headlights of an  
oncoming vehicle, is shining onto  
the driver’s face  
When a lane line is on a curb  
When driving on a bright, reflec-  
tive road surface, such as con-  
crete  
5
When light, either inside or out-  
side of the vehicle, is being  
reflected from the lenses of eye-  
glasses or sunglasses  
Situations in which some or all  
of the functions of the system  
cannot operate  
When there are multiple faces in  
the detection range of the driver  
monitor camera, such as when a  
front or rear passenger is leaning  
toward the driver’s seat  
When a malfunction is detected in  
this system or a related system,  
such as the brakes, steering, etc.  
When the VSC, TRAC, or other  
safety related system is operating  
When the driver’s face is outside  
of the detection range of the driver  
monitor camera, such as when  
leaned forward or when their head  
is outside of the window  
When the VSC, TRAC, or other  
safety related system is off  
Changes in brake operation  
sound and pedal response  
When the driver monitor camera is  
being blocked by the steering  
wheel, a hand holding the steering  
wheel, an arm, etc.  
When the brakes have been oper-  
ated, brake operation sounds may  
be heard and the brake pedal  
response may change, but this  
does not indicate a malfunction.  
When the driver is wearing a hat  
When the system is operating, the  
brake pedal may feel stiffer than  
expected or sink. In either situa-  
tion the brake pedal can be  
depressed further. Further  
depress the brake pedal as nec-  
essary.  
When the driver is wearing an  
eyepatch  
When the driver is wearing eye-  
glasses or sunglasses that do not  
easily transmit infrared rays  
When the driver is wearing con-  
tact lenses  
292  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When the driver is wearing a face  
mask  
*
Driver monitor  
When the driver is laughing or  
their eyes are only slightly open  
*
: If equipped  
When the driver’s eyes, nose,  
mouth, or shape of their face is  
blocked  
Basic functions  
During controlled driving, the  
driver monitor camera detects  
the position and direction the  
driver is facing, and whether  
their eyes are opened or closed.  
Through this, the system deter-  
mines if the driver is checking  
their surroundings and if the  
driver can perform driving oper-  
ations.  
When the driver is wearing  
makeup which makes it difficult to  
detect their eyes, nose, mouth, or  
shape of their face  
When the driver’s eyes are  
blocked by the frame of eye-  
glasses, sunglasses, hair, etc.  
When there is a device inside the  
vehicle that radiates near infrared  
rays, such as a non-genuine  
driver monitoring system.  
Warning function  
In situations such as the follow-  
ing, a buzzer will sound and a  
message will be displayed to  
warn the driver.  
When the system determines  
that the driver is not paying  
attention to the road or their  
eyes are closed  
When the driver’s face cannot  
be detected or the system  
determines that the driver has  
poor driving posture  
293  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
PCS (Pre-Collision Sys-  
tem)  
WARNING  
For safe use  
The driver monitor is not  
designed to prevent the driver  
from driving carelessly or hav-  
ing a poor driving posture. Pay  
careful attention to the sur-  
rounding conditions in order to  
ensure safe driving.  
The pre-collision system  
uses sensors to detect  
objects (P.294) in the path  
of the vehicle. When the  
system determines that the  
possibility of a frontal colli-  
sion with a detectable  
object is high, a warning  
operates to urge the driver  
to take evasive action and  
the potential brake pressure  
is increased to help the  
driver avoid the collision. If  
the system determines that  
the possibility of a collision  
is extremely high, the  
The driver monitor cannot  
reduce drowsiness. If you feel  
unable to concentrate or  
drowsy, take a break and sleep  
as necessary in order to ensure  
safe driving.  
Warning function  
These functions may not operate  
when the vehicle speed is low.  
Situations in which the driver  
monitor may not operate prop-  
erly  
5
brakes are automatically  
applied to help avoid the  
collision or help reduce the  
impact of the collision.  
P.291  
Changing Driver monitor  
settings  
The pre-collision system can  
be disabled/enabled and the  
warning timing can be  
The settings of Driver monitor  
can be changed through cus-  
tomize settings. (P.626)  
changed. (P.304)  
294  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Pedestrians  
WARNING  
Motorcycles*  
Walls  
For safe use  
Driving safely is solely the  
responsibility of the driver. Pay  
careful attention to the sur-  
rounding conditions in order to  
ensure safe driving.  
*
: Detected as a detectable object  
only when being ridden.  
Never use the pre-collision sys-  
tem in place of normal braking  
operations. This system cannot  
help avoid or reduce the impact of  
a collision in every situation.  
Over-reliance on this system to  
drive the vehicle safely may lead  
to an accident resulting in death  
or serious injury.  
System functions  
Pre-collision warning  
When the system determines  
that the possibility of a collision  
is high, a buzzer will sound and  
an icon and warning message  
will be displayed on the multi-  
information display to urge the  
driver to take evasive action.  
Although the pre-collision sys-  
tem is designed to help avoid or  
help reduce the impact of a col-  
lision, its effectiveness may  
change according to various  
conditions. Therefore, it may not  
always be able to achieve the  
same level of performance.  
If the detectable object is a vehi-  
cle, moderate braking will be  
performed with the warning.  
Read the following items care-  
fully. Do not overly rely on this  
system and always drive care-  
fully.  
• For safe use: P.284  
When to disable the pre-colli-  
sion system  
When it is necessary to disable  
the system: P.284  
If the system determines that  
the accelerator pedal is strongly  
depressed, the following icon  
and message will be displayed  
on the multi-information display.  
Detectable objects  
The system can detect the fol-  
lowing as detectable objects.  
(Detectable objects differ  
depending on the function.)  
Vehicles  
Bicycles*  
295  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
steering wheel  
Vehicles with active steering  
function: The brakes and steer-  
ing are controlled to help avoid a  
collision or reduce the impact of  
a collision, regardless of the  
evasive steering maneuvers  
performed by the driver.  
Pre-collision brake assist  
During assistance, the pre-colli-  
sion warning will operate and a  
message will be displayed to  
warn the driver.  
If the system determines that  
the possibility of a collision is  
high and the brake operation by  
the driver is insufficient, the  
braking power will be increased.  
Pre-collision brake control  
If the system determines that  
the possibility of a collision is  
extremely high, the brakes are  
automatically applied to help  
avoid the collision or reduce the  
impact of the collision.  
5
Intersection collision avoid-  
ance support (left/right  
turn)  
Emergency steering assist  
If the system determines that  
the following conditions are met,  
assistance will be provided to  
help enhance vehicle stability  
and prevent lane departure.  
During assistance, in addition to  
the pre-collision warning, the fol-  
lowing icon will be displayed on  
the multi-information display.  
In situations such as the follow-  
ing, if the system determines  
that the possibility of a collision  
is high, the pre-collision warning  
and pre-collision braking will  
operate.  
Depending on the intersection,  
assistance may not operate cor-  
rectly.  
The possibility of a collision is  
high  
When turning left/right at an  
intersection and crossing the  
path of an oncoming vehicle  
There is sufficient space  
within the lane to perform  
evasive steering maneuvers  
The driver is operating the  
296  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When turning left/right and a  
pedestrian or bicycle is  
detected  
Acceleration Suppression  
at Low Speed  
When driving at a low speed, if  
the accelerator pedal is strongly  
depressed and the system  
determines that there is a possi-  
bility of a collision, hybrid sys-  
tem output will be restrained or  
the brakes will be applied  
weakly to restrict acceleration.  
During operation, a buzzer will  
sound and the following icon  
and message will be displayed  
on the multi-information display.  
Intersection collision avoid-  
ance support (crossing  
vehicles)  
At an intersection, etc., if the  
system determines that the pos-  
sibility of a collision with an  
approaching vehicle or motorcy-  
cle is high, the pre-collision  
warning and pre-collision brak-  
ing will operate.  
Depending on the intersection,  
assistance may not operate cor-  
rectly.  
WARNING  
Pre-collision braking  
When the pre-collision braking  
function is operating, a large  
amount of braking force will be  
applied.  
297  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
• If the accelerator pedal is  
WARNING  
depressed strongly, the steering  
wheel is turned heavily, the  
brake pedal is depressed, or the  
turn signal lever is operated, the  
system may determine that the  
driver is taking evasive action  
and the emergency steering  
assist may not operate.  
The pre-collision braking func-  
tion is not designed to hold the  
vehicle stopped. If the vehicle is  
stopped by pre-collision brake  
control, the driver should oper-  
ate the brakes immediately as  
necessary.  
The pre-collision braking func-  
tion may not operate if certain  
operations are performed by the  
driver. If the accelerator pedal is  
being depressed strongly or the  
steering wheel is being turned,  
the system may determine that  
the driver is taking evasive  
action and possibly prevent the  
pre-collision braking function  
from operating.  
• While the emergency steering  
assist is operating, if the accel-  
erator pedal is depressed  
strongly, the steering wheel is  
turned heavily, or the brake  
pedal is depressed, the system  
may determine that the driver is  
taking evasive action and emer-  
gency steering assist operation  
may be canceled.  
• While the emergency steering  
assist is operating, if the steer-  
ing wheel is held or turned in the  
opposite direction of system  
operation, emergency steering  
assist operation will be can-  
celed.  
If the brake pedal is being  
depressed, the system may  
determine that the driver is tak-  
ing evasive action and possibly  
delay the operation timing of the  
pre-collision brake control.  
5
Acceleration Suppression at  
Low Speed  
If the steering wheel is being  
turned, the system may determine  
that the driver is taking evasive  
action and possibly prevent the  
Acceleration Suppression at Low  
Speed function from operating or  
possibly causing its operation to  
be canceled.  
Emergency steering assist  
The emergency steering assist  
will be canceled when the sys-  
tem determines that lane depar-  
ture prevention control has  
completed.  
Depending on operations per-  
formed by the driver, emer-  
gency steering assist may not  
operate or operation may be  
canceled.  
298  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Operating conditions of each function of the pre-collision system  
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the pos-  
sibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high.  
However, the system will not operate in the following situations:  
When the vehicle has not been driven a certain amount after a terminal of  
the 12-volt battery has been disconnected and reconnected  
When the shift position is in R  
When the VSC OFF indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning  
function will be operational)  
The following are the operational speeds and cancelation conditions of each  
function:  
Pre-collision warning  
Relative speed between  
Detectable objects  
Vehicle speed  
your vehicle and object  
Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 110  
mph (5 to 180 km/h) mph (5 to 180 km/h)  
Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 50 to 130  
Preceding vehicles,  
stopped vehicles  
Oncoming vehicles  
Bicycles  
mph (30 to 180 km/h)  
mph (80 to 220 km/h)  
Approximately 3 to 50  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Approximately 3 to 50  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Approximately 3 to 50  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Approximately 3 to 50  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Pedestrians  
Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 50  
stopped motorcycles  
mph (5 to 180 km/h)  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 20 to 110  
mph (30 to 180 km/h)  
Oncoming motorcycles  
mph (30 to 180 km/h)  
While the pre-collision warning is operating, if the steering wheel is operated  
heavily or suddenly, the pre-collision warning may be cancelled.  
Pre-collision brake assist  
Relative speed between  
your vehicle and object  
Detectable objects  
Vehicle speed  
Preceding vehicles, Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 7 to 110  
stopped vehicles  
Bicycles  
mph (30 to 180 km/h)  
Approximately 20 to 50 Approximately 20 to 50  
mph (30 to 80 km/h) mph (30 to 80 km/h)  
mph (10 to 180 km/h)  
299  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Relative speed between  
your vehicle and object  
Detectable objects  
Pedestrians  
Vehicle speed  
Approximately 20 to 50 Approximately 20 to 50  
mph (30 to 80 km/h) mph (30 to 80 km/h)  
Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 7 to 50  
mph (30 to 180 km/h)  
stopped motorcycles  
mph (10 to 80 km/h)  
Pre-collision braking  
Relative speed between  
your vehicle and object  
Detectable objects  
Vehicle speed  
Preceding vehicles,  
stopped vehicles  
Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 110  
mph (5 to 180 km/h) mph (5 to 180 km/h)  
Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 50 to 130  
mph (30 to 180 km/h)  
Oncoming vehicles  
Bicycles  
mph (80 to 220 km/h)  
Approximately 3 to 50  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Approximately 3 to 50  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Approximately 3 to 50  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Approximately 3 to 50  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Pedestrians  
5
Preceding motorcycles, Approximately 3 to 110 Approximately 3 to 50  
stopped motorcycles  
mph (5 to 180 km/h)  
mph (5 to 80 km/h)  
Approximately 20 to 110 Approximately 20 to 110  
mph (30 to 180 km/h)  
Oncoming motorcycles  
mph (30 to 180 km/h)  
If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is oper-  
ating, it will be canceled:  
• The accelerator pedal is strongly depressed  
• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly  
Emergency steering assist  
The emergency steering assist will not operate when the turn signal lights  
are flashing.  
Relative speed between  
your vehicle and object  
Detectable objects  
Preceding vehicles,  
stopped vehicles, bicy- Approximately 25 to 50 Approximately 25 to 50  
Vehicle speed  
cles, pedestrians,  
motorcycles  
mph (40 to 80 km/h)  
mph (40 to 80 km/h)  
300  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Relative speed between  
your vehicle and object  
Detectable objects  
Preceding vehicles,  
stopped vehicles, bicy-  
cles, pedestrians,  
motorcycles  
Vehicle speed  
Active steering function Active steering function  
*
*
(if equipped): to 50  
*
(if equipped): to 50  
*
mph ( to 80 km/h)  
mph ( to 80 km/h)  
*
: Minimum vehicle speed: Vehicle speed at which evasion using pre-colli-  
sion brake control is difficult  
While the emergency steering assist is operating, if any of the following are  
performed, emergency steering assist operation may be cancelled:  
• The accelerator pedal is strongly depressed  
• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly  
• The brake pedal is depressed  
Intersection collision avoidance support (left/right turn)  
The intersection collision avoidance support (for left/right turning vehicles)  
will not operate when the turn signal lights are not flashing.  
Relative speed  
between your  
vehicle and object  
Detectable  
objects  
Oncomingvehicle  
speed  
Vehicle speed  
Approximately 3 Approximately 3 Approximately 7  
to 25 mph (5 to  
40 km/h)  
Oncoming vehi-  
cles  
to 45 mph (5 to to 70 mph (10 to  
115 km/h)  
75 km/h)  
Approximately 3  
to 20 mph (5 to  
30 km/h)  
Approximately 3  
to 25 mph (5 to  
40 km/h)  
Pedestrians  
Bicycles  
-
Approximately 3  
to 20 mph (5 to  
30 km/h)  
Approximately 3  
to 30 mph (5 to  
50 km/h)  
-
Approximately 3 Approximately 3 Approximately 7  
to 25 mph (5 to  
40 km/h)  
Oncoming motor-  
cycles  
to 45 mph (5 to to 70 mph (10 to  
75 km/h) 115 km/h)  
301  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Intersection collision avoidance support (crossing vehicles)  
Vehicles without front side radars  
Relative speed  
between your  
vehicle and object  
Detectable  
objects  
Crossing vehicle  
speed  
Vehicle speed  
• Your vehicle  
speed or less  
• Approximately  
25 mph or less  
(40 km/h or  
less)  
Approximately 3  
to 38 mph (5 to  
60 km/h)  
Approximately 3  
to 38 mph (5 to  
60 km/h)  
Vehicles, Motor-  
cycles (side)  
Vehicles with front side radars  
Relative speed  
between your  
vehicle and object  
Detectable  
Vehicle speed  
objects  
Crossing vehicle  
speed  
Approximately 3 Approximately 31 Approximately 3  
to 38 mph (5 to mph or less (50  
60 km/h) km/h or less)  
Vehicles, Motor-  
cycles (side)  
to 38 mph (5 to  
60 km/h)  
5
When driving at approximately 29 mph (40 km/h) or more, this system will  
only operate when the speed of the other vehicle is approximately 29 mph  
(40 km/h) or less.  
The system operates only when the crossing vehicle speed is same as or  
less than the vehicle speed.  
Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed  
The Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function will not operate when  
the turn signal lights are flashing.  
Relative speed between  
your vehicle and object  
Detectable objects  
Vehicle speed  
Preceding vehicles,  
stopped vehicles,  
Pedestrians, Bicycles,  
Wall  
Approximately 0 to 9  
mph (0 to 15 km/h)  
Approximately 0 to 9  
mph (0 to 15 km/h)  
While the Acceleration Suppression at Low Speed function is operating, if  
any of the following are performed, the low speed sudden acceleration sup-  
pression function operation will be cancelled:  
• The accelerator pedal is released.  
• The steering wheel is operated heavily or suddenly  
302  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Detection of detectable objects  
may be mistaken for a detectable  
object  
• When passing a detectable object  
that is changing lanes or turning  
left/right  
Objects are detected based on their  
size, shape, and movement.  
Depending on the ambient bright-  
ness, movement, posture and direc-  
tion of a detectable object, it may  
not be detected and the system may  
not operate properly.  
The system detects shapes, such  
as the following, as detectable  
objects.  
• When passing a detectable object  
which is stopped to make a  
left/right turn  
Situations in which the system  
may operate even though the  
possibility of a collision is not  
high  
In certain situations, such as the  
following, the system may deter-  
mine that the possibility of a colli-  
sion is high and operate:  
• When a detectable object stops  
immediately before entering the  
path of the vehicle  
• When passing a detectable object  
• When changing lanes while over-  
taking a detectable object  
• When passing through a location  
with a structure above the road  
(traffic sign, billboard, etc.)  
• When suddenly approaching a  
detectable object  
• When approaching a detectable  
object or other object on the road-  
side, such as guardrails, utility  
poles, trees, walls, etc.  
• When there is a detectable object  
or other object by the roadside at  
the entrance of a curve  
• When approaching an electric toll  
gate barrier, parking lot barrier, or  
other barrier that opens and  
closes  
• When turning left/right and an  
oncoming vehicle, oncoming  
motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle  
crosses in front of the vehicle  
• When attempting to turn left/right  
in front of an oncoming vehicle,  
oncoming motorcycle, pedestrian  
• When there are patterns or a  
painting ahead of the vehicle that  
303  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
or bicycle  
hole cover, steel plate on the road  
surface, or another vehicle  
• When there is a structure above a  
detectable object  
• When part of a detectable object  
is hidden by another object (large  
luggage, umbrella, guardrail, etc.)  
• When multiple detectable objects  
are overlapping  
• When turning left/right and an  
oncoming vehicle, oncoming  
motorcycle, pedestrian or bicycle  
stops or changes course immedi-  
ately before entering the path of  
the vehicle  
• When turning left/right and an  
oncoming vehicle turns left/right in  
front of the vehicle  
• When a bright light, such as the  
sun, is reflecting off of a detect-  
able object  
• When a detectable object is white  
and looks extremely bright  
• When the color or brightness of a  
detectable object causes it to  
blend in with its surroundings  
• When a detectable object cuts in  
front of or suddenly emerges in  
front of your vehicle  
• When the steering wheel is oper-  
ated toward the path of an oncom-  
ing vehicle  
• When there is an object moving  
above or under the road  
• When approaching a vehicle  
which is diagonal  
• If a bicycle is a child sized bicycle,  
is carrying a large load, is carrying  
an extra passenger, is carrying a  
forward leaning rider, or has an  
unusual shape (bicycles equipped  
with a child seat, tandem bicycles,  
etc.)  
5
• If a pedestrian or bicycle is shorter  
than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or  
taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2  
m).  
• When the silhouette of a pedes-  
trian or bicycle is unclear (such as  
when they are wearing a raincoat,  
long skirt, etc.)  
• When a pedestrian is bending for-  
ward or squatting  
• When a pedestrian or bicycle is  
moving at high speed  
• When a pedestrian is pushing a  
stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or  
other vehicle  
• When a detectable object blends  
in with the surrounding area, such  
as when it is dim (at dawn or dusk)  
or dark (at night or in a tunnel)  
• When the vehicle has not been  
driven for a certain amount of time  
after the hybrid system was  
started  
Situations in which the system  
may not operate properly  
In certain situations, such as the  
following, a detectable object may  
not be detected by the front sen-  
sors, and the system may not  
operate properly:  
• When a detectable object is  
approaching your vehicle  
• When your vehicle or a detectable  
object is wandering  
• When a detectable object makes  
an abrupt maneuver (such as sud-  
den swerving, acceleration or  
deceleration)  
• When suddenly approaching a  
detectable object  
• When the detectable object is  
near a wall, fence, guardrail, man-  
• While turning left/right or a few  
seconds after turning left/right  
304  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
• While driving around a curve and  
a few seconds after driving around  
a curve  
• When turning left/right and an  
oncoming vehicle is driving in a  
lane 3 or more lanes from the  
vehicle  
• When turning left/right and the  
direction of the vehicle differs  
greatly from the direction traffic  
flows in the oncoming lane  
as a target object and the Acceler-  
ation Suppression at Low Speed  
function may not operate properly:  
• When scenery behind the wall is  
visible, such as a glass door, grid  
fence, etc.  
• When the wall is slanted or low  
• When the wall is narrow, such as  
a pole, etc.  
• When the wall is made of plants,  
such as a hedge, etc.  
• When the road, etc. is reflected on  
the wall  
• When the vehicle is approaching  
the wall at an angle  
Changing the pre-colli-  
sion setting  
The pre-collision system can  
be enabled/disabled through  
a customize setting.  
• When turning left/right, a pedes-  
trian or bicycle behind the vehicle  
comes in front of it as if it over-  
takes the vehicle  
(P.626)  
The system is enabled each time  
the power switch is turned to ON.  
When the system is disabled,  
the PCS warning light will illu-  
minate and a message will be  
displayed on the multi-infor-  
mation display.  
• When at an intersection, the  
approaching crossing vehicle is  
long in overall length, such as a  
large truck, towing trailer, etc.  
The pre-collision setting can  
be changed on the customize  
settings. (P.626)  
In addition to the preceding, in  
certain situations, such as the fol-  
lowing, the emergency steering  
assist may not operate properly:  
• When a detectable object is too  
close to the vehicle  
• When there is insufficient space to  
perform evasive steering maneu-  
vers or an obstruction exists in the  
evasion direction  
Vehicles without active steer-  
ing function: When the pre-  
collision warning timing is  
changed, the emergency  
steering assist timing will also  
be changed.  
• When there is an oncoming vehi-  
cle  
When later is selected, the  
emergency steering assist will  
not operate in most cases.  
In addition to the preceding, in  
certain situations, such as the fol-  
lowing, walls may not be detected  
305  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Vehicles with active steering  
function: When the pre-colli-  
sion warning timing is  
LTA (Lane Tracing  
Assist)  
changed, the emergency  
steering assist (excluding the  
active steering function) tim-  
ing will also be changed.  
LTA functions  
When driving on a road with  
clear lane lines with the  
dynamic radar cruise control  
operating, lane lines and pre-  
ceding and surrounding vehi-  
cles are detected using the  
front camera and radar sen-  
sor, and the steering wheel is  
operated to maintain the vehi-  
cle’s lane position.  
When later is selected, the  
emergency steering assist  
(excluding the active steering  
function) will not operate in most  
cases.  
Vehicles with a driver monitor  
camera: When the system  
determines that the driver is  
not facing forward, the pre-  
collision warning and emer-  
gency steering assist will  
Use this function only on highways  
and expressways.  
If the dynamic radar cruise control  
is not operating, the function will not  
operate.  
5
operate at the earlier timing,  
regardless of the user setting.  
In situations where the lane lines  
are difficult to see or are not visible,  
such as when in a traffic jam, sup-  
port will be provided using the path  
of preceding and surrounding vehi-  
cles.  
When the dynamic radar  
cruise control is operating, the  
pre-collision warning will  
operate at the earlier timing,  
regardless of the user setting.  
Vehicles with Traffic Jam  
Assist: When the Traffic Jam  
Assist is operating, the pre-  
collision warning will operate  
at the earlier timing, regard-  
less of the user setting.  
If the system determines that the  
steering wheel has not been oper-  
ated for a certain amount of time or  
the steering wheel is not being  
firmly gripped, the driver will be  
alerted and this function will be  
temporarily canceled.  
If the steering wheel is firmly  
gripped, the function will begin  
operating again.  
306  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When the function is operat-  
ing, if the vehicle is likely to  
depart from its lane, the driver  
will be alerted via a display  
and buzzer.  
WARNING  
Before using the LTA system  
Do not overly rely on the LTA  
system. The LTA system is not  
a system which provides auto-  
mated assistance in driving and  
it is not a system which reduces  
the amount of attention neces-  
sary for safe driving. The driver  
is solely responsible for paying  
attention to their surroundings  
and operating the steering  
When the buzzer sounds, check  
the area around the vehicle and  
carefully operate the steering wheel  
to move the vehicle back to the  
center of the lane.  
wheel as necessary to ensure  
safety. Also, the driver is  
responsible for taking adequate  
breaks when fatigued, such as  
when driving for a long time.  
Failure to perform appropriate  
driving operations and pay care-  
ful attention may lead to an  
accident.  
When not using the LTA sys-  
tem, turn it off using the LTA  
switch.  
307  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Lane departure warning func-  
tion when the LTA is operating  
Operating conditions of func-  
tion  
Even if the LDA warning method is  
changed to vibration of the steer-  
ing wheel, if the vehicle deviates  
from the lane while the LTA is  
operating, the warning buzzer will  
sound to alert the driver.  
This function is operable when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
The LTA system detects lane lines  
or the path of preceding or sur-  
rounding vehicles.  
If steering wheel operation equiv-  
alent to that necessary for a lane  
change is detected, the system  
will determine the vehicle is not  
deviating from the lane and the  
warning will not operate.  
The dynamic radar cruise control  
is operating.  
The lane width is approximately  
10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).  
The turn signal lever is not being  
operated.  
Hands off steering wheel warn-  
ing operation  
The vehicle is not being driven  
around a sharp curve.  
When the system determines the  
driver is not holding the steering  
wheel, a message urging the  
driver to grip the steering wheel  
and the icon shown in the illustra-  
tion will be displayed on the multi-  
information display to warn the  
driver. If the system detects that  
the steering wheel is held, the  
warning will be canceled. When  
using the system, make sure to  
grip the steering wheel firmly,  
regardless of whether the warn-  
ing is operating or not.  
The vehicle is not accelerating or  
decelerating more than a certain  
amount.  
The steering wheel is not being  
turned with a large force.  
5
The hands off steering wheel  
warning (P.307) is not operat-  
ing.  
The vehicle is being driven in the  
center of a lane.  
Temporary cancelation of func-  
tions  
When the operating conditions are  
no longer met, a function may be  
temporarily canceled. However,  
when the operation conditions are  
met again, operation of the func-  
tion will automatically be restored.  
(P.307)  
If the operating conditions of a  
function are no longer met while  
the function is operating, a buzzer  
may sound to indicate that the  
function has been temporarily  
canceled.  
If no operations are detected for a  
certain amount of time, the warn-  
ing will operate and the function  
will be temporarily canceled. This  
warning may also operate if the  
driver only operates steering  
wheel a small amount continu-  
ously.  
The steering assist operation of  
the function can be overridden by  
the steering wheel operation of  
the driver.  
Situations in which the hands  
off steering wheel warning may  
not operate properly  
Depending on the condition of the  
308  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
vehicle, handle control condition  
and road surface, the warning  
function may not operate.  
WARNING  
Situations in which the func-  
tions may not operate prop-  
erly  
Vehicles with LCA: In the following  
situations, the system may not be  
able to detect when the driver’s  
hands are off the steering wheel.  
• When a steering wheel cover is  
installed  
• When the driver is wearing gloves  
• When foreign matter is attached to  
the steering wheel  
• When the driver is gripping the  
wood trim, seam of the leather,  
spokes, or other part of the steer-  
ing wheel that does not have sen-  
sors  
In the following situations, the  
functions may not operate prop-  
erly and the vehicle may depart  
from its lane. Do not overly rely on  
these functions. The driver is  
solely responsible for paying  
attention to their surroundings  
and operating the steering wheel  
as necessary to ensure safety.  
When a preceding or surround-  
ing vehicle changes lanes (Your  
vehicle may follow the preced-  
ing or surrounding vehicle and  
also change lanes)  
Vehicles with LCA: In the following  
situations, the hands off steering  
wheel warning may not operate  
and the LTA function may con-  
tinue operating even though the  
driver’s hands are off the steering  
wheel:  
• When something other than a  
hand is contacting the steering  
wheel  
• When a wide object or arms are  
held across the steering wheel  
When a preceding or surround-  
ing vehicle is swaying (Your  
vehicle may sway accordingly  
and depart from the lane)  
Enabling/disabling the  
system  
When a preceding or surround-  
ing vehicle departs from a lane  
(Your vehicle may follow the  
preceding or surrounding vehi-  
cle and also depart from the  
lane)  
The LTA will change between  
ON/OFF each time the LTA  
switch is pressed.  
When the LTA is ON, the LTA indi-  
cator will illuminate.  
When a preceding or surround-  
ing vehicle is being driven  
extremely close to the left/right  
lane line (Your vehicle may fol-  
low the preceding or surround-  
ing vehicle accordingly and  
depart from the lane)  
309  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
WARNING  
When there are moving objects  
or structures in the surrounding  
area (Depending on the position  
of the moving object or structure  
relative to your vehicle, your  
vehicle may sway)  
When the vehicle is struck by a  
crosswind or the turbulence of  
other nearby vehicles  
Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly:  
P.289  
Situations in which the lane may  
not be detected: P.291  
When it is necessary to disable  
the system: P.284  
Operation display of steering wheel operation support  
5
The operating state of the LTA system is indicated.  
Indicator  
Lane display  
Gray/White  
Green  
Steering icon  
Situation  
LTA is on standby  
LTA is operating  
White  
Gray  
Green  
Green  
The vehicle is  
departing the lane  
toward the side  
which the lane  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Green  
Flashing  
Flashing  
display is flashing  
310  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
LCA (Lane Change  
WARNING  
*
Assist)  
Before using the LCA system  
Do not overly rely on the LCA  
system.  
*
: If equipped  
The LCA system is not a system  
which provides automated assis-  
tance in driving and it is not a sys-  
tem which reduces the need for  
checking an adjacent lane for  
other vehicles, approaching vehi-  
cles, etc. when changing lanes.  
The driver is solely responsible for  
paying attention to their surround-  
ings and operating the steering  
wheel as necessary to ensure  
safety.  
LCA functions  
This function is linked to the LTA  
and provides assistance in per-  
forming lane changes through  
steering wheel operations.  
Use the this function only on high-  
ways and expressways.  
The steering assist operation can  
be overridden by the steering wheel  
operation of the driver.  
Also, do not use the LCA to  
change lanes into which a lane  
change should not be performed  
(oncoming lanes, road shoulders,  
etc.).  
The lane change assist function is  
not designed to operate when  
changing lanes at a junction.  
Failure to perform appropriate  
driving operations and pay care-  
ful attention may lead to an  
accident.  
Operating conditions of func-  
tion  
This function is operable when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
The LTA is operating.  
The lane change assist function is  
enabled by a customize setting.  
The vehicle speed is between  
approximately 55 and 85 mph (90  
and 140 km/h).  
The system detects a broken  
white line on the side which the  
lane change is to be performed.  
A vehicle is not detected in the  
lane toward which the turn signal  
is operated.  
The steering wheel is not being  
turned with a large force.  
311  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
The hands off steering wheel  
warning (P.307) is not operat-  
ing.  
Cancelation of functions  
In the following situations, opera-  
tion of the LCA may be canceled  
with the display and buzzer:  
When the operating conditions  
(P.307) are no longer met  
When the system can no longer  
Situations in which the hands  
off steering wheel warning may  
not operate properly  
detect lane lines  
Depending on the condition of the  
vehicle, handle control condition  
and road surface, the warning  
function may not operate.  
When the turn signal lever is oper-  
ated to the second position  
(P.311)  
When the turn signal lever is oper-  
ated in the opposite direction of  
the lane change  
In the following situations, the sys-  
tem may not be able to detect  
when the driver’s hands are off  
the steering wheel.  
• When a steering wheel cover is  
installed  
• When the driver is wearing gloves  
• When foreign matter is attached to  
the steering wheel  
• When the driver is gripping the  
wood trim, seam of the leather,  
spokes, or other part of the steer-  
ing wheel that does not have sen-  
sors  
When the system detects opera-  
tion of the steering wheel, brake  
pedal or accelerator pedal by the  
driver  
5
If the system detects that a vehicle  
is quickly approaching in the lane  
toward which the turn signal is oper-  
ated a buzzer will sound and a mes-  
sage will be displayed to alert the  
driver. At the same time the steering  
wheel may be slightly operated to  
help keep the vehicle away from the  
approaching vehicle.  
In the following situations, the  
hands off steering wheel warning  
may not operate and the LCA  
function may continue operating  
even though the driver’s hands  
are off the steering wheel:  
• When something other than a  
hand is contacting the steering  
wheel  
Hands off steering wheel warn-  
ing operation  
When the system determines the  
driver is not holding the steering  
wheel, a message urging the driver  
to grip the steering wheel and the  
icon shown in the illustration will be  
displayed on the multi-information  
display to warn the driver. If the sys-  
tem detects that the steering wheel  
is held, the warning will be can-  
celed. When using the system,  
make sure to grip the steering wheel  
firmly, regardless of whether the  
warning is operating or not.  
• When a wide object or arms are  
held across the steering wheel  
Operating the LCA  
If the turn signal lever is held in  
the first position, the lane  
change direction will be dis-  
played and the function will  
operate.  
312  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
To change lanes by holding the  
turn signal lever in the first posi-  
tion without using the LCA, turn  
the customize setting of the LCA  
off.  
1 First position: LCA is opera-  
tional  
2 Second position: LCA is not  
operational  
WARNING  
Situations in which the LCA  
should not be used  
When driving on a one lane  
road  
When there is no broken white  
line between the current lane  
and the lane to be changed to  
Enabling/disabling the  
system  
LCA can be enabled/disabled  
through a customize setting.  
(P.626)  
Displays and system operation  
The operating state of the LCA system is indicated.  
LCA display  
Steering icon  
Condition  
LCA is operating  
Blue arrow and white  
line  
Green  
Approaching vehicle  
detected while LCA is  
operating  
Grey  
Grey  
Lane line no longer  
detected while LCA is  
operating  
Not displayed  
313  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
such as a curb, guardrail, etc.  
LDA (Lane Departure  
Alert)  
Basic functions  
The LDA system warns the  
driver if the vehicle may deviate  
from the current lane or course*,  
and also can slightly operate the  
steering wheel to help avoid  
deviation from the lane or  
course*.  
The front camera is used to  
detect lane lines or a course*.  
*
: Boundary between the asphalt  
and grass, soil, etc., or structures,  
such as a curb, guardrail, etc.  
Lane departure prevention  
function  
5
Lane departure alert func-  
tion  
If the system determines that  
the vehicle is likely to depart  
When the system determines  
that the vehicle might depart  
from its lane or course*, it pro-  
vides assistance through steer-  
ing wheel operations to help  
avoid deviation from the lane or  
course.  
from its lane or course*, a warn-  
ing is displayed on a display,  
and either a warning buzzer will  
sound or the steering wheel will  
vibrate to alert the driver.  
If the system determines that the  
steering wheel has not been oper-  
ated for a certain amount of time or  
the steering wheel is not being  
firmly gripped, a warning message  
may be displayed and a warning  
buzzer may sound to alert the  
driver.  
Check the area around your vehicle  
and carefully operate the steering  
wheel to move the vehicle back to  
*
the center of the lane or course .  
Vehicles with BSM: If the system  
determines that the vehicle may  
collide with a vehicle in an adjacent  
lane, the lane departure alert will  
operate even if the turn signals are  
operating.  
Vehicles with BSM: If the system  
determines that the vehicle may  
collide with a vehicle in an adjacent  
lane, the lane departure prevention  
function will operate even if the turn  
signals are operating.  
*
: Boundary between the asphalt  
and grass, soil, etc., or structures,  
314  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
*
: Boundary between the asphalt  
and grass, soil, etc., or structures,  
such as a curb, guardrail, etc.  
WARNING  
Before using the LDA system  
Do not overly rely on the LDA  
system. The LDA system is not  
a system which provides auto-  
mated assistance in driving and  
it is not a system which reduces  
the amount of attention neces-  
sary for safe driving. The driver  
is solely responsible for paying  
attention to their surroundings  
and operating the steering  
Break suggestion function  
If the vehicle is swaying, a mes-  
sage will be displayed and a  
buzzer will sound to urge the  
driver to take a break.  
wheel as necessary to ensure  
safety. Also, the driver is  
responsible for taking adequate  
breaks when fatigued, such as  
when driving for a long time.  
Failure to perform appropriate  
driving operations and pay care-  
ful attention may lead to an  
accident.  
Operating conditions of each  
function  
Lane departure alert/prevention  
function  
This function is operable when all of  
315  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
the following conditions are met:  
• The vehicle speed is approxi-  
mately 30 mph (50 km/h) or more.  
road conditions, lane departure  
angle, etc., operation of the lane  
departure prevention function may  
not be felt or the function may not  
operate.  
Operation may be possible when  
the vehicle speed is approximately  
25 mph (40 km/h) or more if vehi-  
cles, motorcycles, bicycles, or  
pedestrians are detected near the  
lane.  
Depending on the conditions, the  
warning buzzer may operate even  
if vibration is selected through a  
customize setting.  
*
If a course is not clear or straight,  
• The system recognizes a lane or  
*
the lane departure alert function or  
lane departure prevention function  
may not operate.  
course . (When recognized on  
only one side, the system will  
operate only for the recognized  
side.)  
• The lane width is approximately  
9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.  
The lane departure alert function  
or lane departure prevention func-  
tion may not operate if the system  
judges that the vehicle is inten-  
tionally being steered to avoid a  
pedestrian or parked vehicle.  
• The turn signal lever is not being  
operated.  
(Vehicles with BSM: Except when a  
vehicle is detected in the direction  
that the turn signal lever is oper-  
ated.)  
Vehicles with BSM: It may not be  
possible for the system to judge if  
there is danger of a collision with a  
vehicle in an adjacent lane.  
5
• The vehicle is not being driven  
around a sharp curve.  
• The vehicle is not accelerating or  
decelerating more than a certain  
amount.  
• The steering wheel is not being  
turned sufficiently to perform a  
lane change.  
• When the VSC or TRAC system is  
not turned off  
Vehicles with a driver monitor  
camera: Depending on the driver  
condition, the lane departure alert  
function or lane departure preven-  
tion function changes the timing of  
operation.  
The steering assist operation of  
the lane departure prevention  
function can be overridden by the  
steering wheel operation of the  
driver.  
*
: Boundary between the asphalt  
and grass, soil, etc., or structures,  
such as a curb, guardrail, etc.  
*
: Boundary between the asphalt  
and grass, soil, etc., or structures,  
such as a curb, guardrail, etc.  
Temporary cancellation of func-  
tions  
Hands off steering wheel warn-  
ing operation  
When the operating conditions are  
no longer met, a function may be  
temporarily canceled. However,  
when the operation conditions are  
met again, operation of the function  
will automatically be restored.  
(P.314)  
In the following situations, a mes-  
sage urging the driver to operate the  
steering wheel and an icon will be  
displayed and a buzzer will sound to  
warn the driver. When using the  
system, make sure to grip the steer-  
ing wheel firmly, regardless of  
whether the warning is operating or  
not.  
Operation of the lane departure  
alert function/lane departure  
prevention function  
Depending on the vehicle speed,  
316  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
suggestion function may not oper-  
ate.  
When the system determines that  
the driver is not securely holding  
the steering wheel, or the steering  
wheel is not being operated when  
the steering assist operation of the  
lane departure prevention function  
is operating  
Press the  
meter control switch  
*1  
to turn off the message.  
Unless  
is pressed, the message  
Except for Puerto Rico: The length  
of time that the warning buzzer  
operates will become longer as the  
frequency of the steering assist  
operating increases. If the system  
judges that the steering wheel has  
been operated, the warning buzzer  
will stop.  
of the break suggestion function will  
*1  
remain displayed.  
*1  
:For Puerto Rico  
*2  
:Except for Puerto Rico  
Changing LDA settings  
For Puerto Rico: The length of time  
that the warning buzzer operates  
will become longer as the frequency  
of the steering assist operating  
increases. Even if the system  
judges that the steering wheel has  
been operated, the warning buzzer  
will sound for a certain amount of  
time.  
The LDA system can be  
enabled/disabled through a  
customize setting. (P.627)  
The settings of the LDA can  
be changed on the customize  
settings. (P.627)  
WARNING  
Situations in which the sys-  
Break suggestion function  
tem may not operate properly  
This function is operable when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
In the following situations, the  
system may not operate properly  
and the vehicle may depart from  
its lane. Do not overly rely on  
these functions. The driver is  
solely responsible for paying  
attention to their surroundings  
and operating the steering wheel  
as necessary to ensure safety.  
The vehicle speed is approxi-  
mately 40 mph (65 km/h) or  
*1  
more.  
The vehicle speed is approxi-  
mately 32 mph (50 km/h) or  
*2  
more.  
The lane width is approximately  
9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.  
Depending on the condition of the  
vehicle and road surface, the break  
317  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
WARNING  
When the boundary between  
the asphalt and grass, soil, etc.,  
or structures, such as a curb,  
guardrail, etc. is not clear or  
straight  
When the vehicle is struck by a  
crosswind or the turbulence of  
other nearby vehicles  
Situations in which the lane may  
not be detected: P.291  
Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly:  
P.289  
Situations in which some or all  
of the functions of the system  
cannot operate: P.291  
When it is necessary to disable  
the system: P.284  
5
Displays and system operation  
The operating state of the lane departure alert function and steering  
assist operation of the lane departure prevention function are indi-  
cated.  
Except for Puerto Rico  
Indicator  
Lane display  
Steering icon  
Condition  
Not illuminated  
Not illuminated  
Not illuminated System disabled  
Lane lines are not  
Not illuminated  
Not illuminated  
detected by the  
system  
White  
White  
Gray  
Lane lines are  
detected by the  
system  
White  
318  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Indicator  
Lane display  
Steering icon  
Condition  
Lane departure  
alert function is  
operating for the  
side which the  
lane display is  
flashing  
Not illuminated  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Flashing  
Flashing  
Lane departure  
prevention func-  
tion is operating  
for the side which  
the lane display is  
illuminated  
Green  
Green  
Green  
Lane departure  
alert func-  
tion/lane depar-  
ture prevention  
function is operat-  
ing for the side  
which the lane  
display is flashing  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Green  
Flashing  
Flashing  
For Puerto Rico  
Indicator  
Lane display Steering icon  
Situation  
Not illumi-  
nated  
Not illumi-  
nated  
System disabled  
Yellow  
Illuminated  
Not illumi-  
nated  
Not illumi- Lane lines are not detected by  
nated the system  
Gray  
Not illumi-  
nated  
Not illumi- Lane lines are detected by the  
nated  
system  
White  
Lane departure alert function  
is operating for the side which  
the lane display is flashing  
Not illumi-  
nated  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Flashing  
Flashing  
319  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Indicator  
Green  
Lane display Steering icon  
Situation  
Lane departure prevention  
function is operating for the  
side which the lane display is  
illuminated  
Green  
Green  
Green  
Lane departure alert func-  
tion/lane departure prevention  
function is operating for the  
side which the lane display is  
flashing  
Yellow  
Yellow  
Flashing  
Flashing  
5
320  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
The proactive driving assist is  
PDA (Proactive driv-  
ing assist)  
not a system which reduces the  
amount of attention necessary  
for safe driving. Even if the sys-  
tem is operating correctly, the  
surrounding conditions as rec-  
ognized by the driver and  
detected by the system may dif-  
fer. It is necessary for the driver  
to pay attention, assess risks,  
and ensure safety. Over-reli-  
ance on this system to drive the  
vehicle safely may lead to an  
accident resulting in death or  
serious injury.  
When a detectable object  
(P.321) is detected, the  
proactive driving assist  
operates the brakes and  
steering wheel to help pre-  
vent the vehicle from  
approaching too close to  
the object.  
Proactive driving assist is not a  
system which allows for inatten-  
tive driving and is not a system  
which assists in poor visibility  
conditions. The driver is solely  
responsible for paying attention  
to their surroundings and driving  
safely.  
WARNING  
For safe use  
Driving safely is solely the respon-  
sibility of the driver.  
The proactive driving assist is  
designed to provide some  
assistance for regular braking  
and steering operations, as well  
as helping to prevent the vehicle  
from approaching too close to a  
detectable object. However, the  
scope of this assistance is lim-  
ited.  
When turning proactive driv-  
ing assist off  
Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly:  
P.323  
When it is necessary to disable  
the system: P.284  
The driver should perform brake  
and steering operations as neces-  
sary. Read the following items  
carefully. Do not overly rely on the  
proactive driving assist and  
always drive carefully. (P.323)  
321  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
System operating conditions and detectable objects  
According to the driving conditions, the operation and detectable  
objects of the proactive driving assist will change as follows.  
Detectable  
objects  
Function  
Conditions  
Operation  
Assistance with  
some brake oper-  
ations is pro-  
A detectable  
Pedestrians  
Bicyclists  
object is detected vided in order to  
crossing the road reduce the possi-  
bility of a colli-  
sion.  
Assistance with  
some brake and  
steering wheel  
operations are  
provided accord-  
ing to the sur-  
rounding  
conditions to help  
prevent the vehi-  
cle from  
5
Obstacle Antici-  
pation Assist  
(OAA)  
A detectable  
Pedestrians  
Bicyclists  
Parked vehicles  
object is detected  
approaching too  
on the side of the  
road  
close to a  
detected object.  
Assistance with  
steering wheel  
operations is pro-  
vided within a  
range that the  
vehicle will not  
deviate from its  
current lane.  
322  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Detectable  
objects  
Function  
Conditions  
Operation  
The vehicle is  
A preceding vehi- gently deceler-  
cle or an adjacent ated so that the Preceding vehi-  
vehicle cutting in vehicle-to-vehi- cles  
front of the vehi- cle distance will Motorcycles  
cle is detected  
not be exces-  
sively short.  
Deceleration  
Assist (DA)  
The vehicle is  
gently deceler-  
ated if the vehicle  
A curve is  
detected ahead of speed is deter- None  
the vehicle  
mined to be too  
high for the curve  
ahead.  
The system antic-  
ipates the driver’s  
operation and  
supports the  
operation of the  
steering wheel.  
Steering Assist  
(SA)  
Lane is detected  
None  
Approximately 5 to 80 mph (10 to  
140 km/h)  
Vehicle speeds at which the  
system can operate  
System operation will be can-  
celed when  
Detectable object crossing the  
road assistance  
In the following situations, system  
operation will be canceled:  
• When the dynamic radar cruise  
control or cruise control is operat-  
ing  
Approximately 20 to 35 mph (30 to  
60 km/h)  
Detectable object on the side of  
the road assistance  
• When the PCS is off  
Approximately 20 to 35 mph (30 to  
60 km/h)  
• Situations in which some or all of  
the functions of the system cannot  
operate: P.291  
• When the P, R or N shift position  
is selected  
Preceding vehicle deceleration  
assistance  
Approximately 15 mph (20 km/h) or  
more  
In the following situations, the  
brake operation assist will be can-  
celed:  
• Approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or  
less  
• When a certain vehicle speed has  
been reached, as judged by the  
system, according to the sur-  
Curve deceleration assistance  
Approximately 15 mph (20 km/h) or  
more  
Steering assist within a lane  
323  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
rounding conditions  
When passing through a place  
with a low structure above the  
road (tunnel with a low ceiling,  
traffic sign, signboard, etc.)  
In the following situations, system  
operation may be canceled:  
• When the brake control or output  
restriction control of a driving sup-  
port system operates (For exam-  
ple: PCS, drive-start control)  
• When the system determines that  
a detected object has moved  
away from the vehicle  
When driving on snowy, icy, or  
rutted roads  
When a detectable object is  
approaching your vehicle  
• When lane lines can no longer be  
detected  
When your vehicle or a detect-  
able object is wandering  
• When the brake pedal has been  
depressed  
When the movement of a  
detectable object changes  
(change in direction, sudden  
acceleration or deceleration,  
etc.)  
• When the accelerator pedal has  
been depressed  
• When the steering wheel has  
been operated with more than a  
certain amount of force  
• When the turn signal lever is oper-  
ated to the left/right turn position  
When suddenly approaching a  
detectable object  
When a preceding vehicle or  
motorcycle is not directly in front  
of your vehicle  
WARNING  
5
Situations in which the sys-  
tem may not operate properly  
When there is a structure above  
a detectable object  
Situations in which the lane may  
not be detected: P.291  
When part of a detectable  
object is hidden by another  
object (large luggage, umbrella,  
guardrail, etc.)  
When a detectable object stops  
immediately before entering the  
path of the vehicle  
When multiple detectable  
When passing extremely close  
to a detectable object behind a  
guardrail, fence, etc.  
objects are overlapping  
When a bright light, such as the  
sun or headlights of another  
vehicle, is reflecting off of the  
detectable object  
When changing lanes while  
overtaking a detectable object  
When passing a detectable  
object that is changing lanes or  
turning left/right  
When the detectable object is  
white and looks extremely bright  
When the color or brightness of  
the detectable object causes it  
to blend in with its surroundings  
When there are objects (guard-  
rails, power poles, trees, walls,  
fences, poles, traffic cones,  
mailboxes, etc.) in the surround-  
ing area  
When a detectable object cuts  
in front of or emerges from  
beside a vehicle  
When there are patterns or a  
painting ahead of the vehicle  
that may be mistaken for a  
detectable object  
324  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When the lane width is 13.1 ft.  
WARNING  
(4 m) or more  
When approaching a vehicle  
ahead which is perpendicular or  
at an angle to the vehicle, or is  
facing the vehicle  
When the lane width is 8.2 ft.  
(2.5 m) or less  
When the vehicle has not been  
driven for a certain amount of  
time after the hybrid system was  
started  
If a parked vehicle is perpendic-  
ular or at an angle to the vehicle  
When a bicycle is a child sized  
bicycle, is carrying a large load,  
is carrying an extra passenger,  
or has an unusual shape (bicy-  
cles equipped with a child seat,  
tandem bicycles, etc.)  
While turning left or right or a  
few seconds after turning left or  
right  
While changing lanes or a few  
seconds after changing lanes  
When a pedestrian or bicyclist is  
shorter than approximately 3.2  
ft. (1 m) or taller than approxi-  
mately 6.5 ft. (2 m)  
When entering a curve, driving  
around a curve and a few sec-  
onds after driving around a  
curve  
When the silhouette of a pedes-  
trian or bicyclist is unclear (such  
as when they are wearing a  
raincoat, long skirt, etc.)  
Changing proactive driv-  
ing assist settings  
When a pedestrian or bicyclist is  
bending forward or squatting  
The proactive driving assist  
can be enabled/disabled  
through a customize setting.  
(P.627)  
When a pedestrian or bicyclist is  
moving at high speed  
When a pedestrian is pushing a  
stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or  
other vehicle  
The settings of the proactive  
driving assist can be changed  
through customize settings.  
(P.627)  
When a detectable object  
blends in with the surrounding  
area, such as when it is dim (at  
dawn or dusk) or dark (at night,  
in a tunnel, etc.)  
System operation display  
Depending on the situation, the following indicators or icons will be  
displayed.  
Some icons cannot be displayed unless the display is changed to  
the driving safety support function information screen.  
325  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Icon  
Meaning  
White: Monitoring for detectable  
objects  
Green: Detectable object crossing  
the road or detectable object on  
the side of the road assistance  
operating  
A pedestrian has been detected as  
crossing the road or on the side of  
the road and brake or steering assis-  
tance is operating  
A vehicle has been detected on the  
side of the road and brake or steer-  
ing operation assistance is being  
performed  
5
Steering operation assistance is  
being performed to prevent the  
vehicle from approaching too close  
to a detectable object on the side  
of the road  
When the steering assist is operat-  
ing  
Preceding vehicle deceleration  
assistance is being performed  
Warning to maintain appropriate  
vehicle-to-vehicle distance  
Curve deceleration assistance is  
being performed  
system detects that the steering  
wheel is held, the warning will be  
canceled. When using the system,  
make sure to grip the steering wheel  
firmly, regardless of whether the  
warning is operating or not.  
Hands off steering wheel warn-  
ing operation  
In the following situations, a mes-  
sage urging the driver to grip the  
steering wheel and the icon shown  
in the illustration will be displayed on  
the display to warn the driver. If the  
326  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
FCTA (Front Cross  
*
Traffic Alert)  
*
: If equipped  
When approaching an inter-  
section, etc., at a low speed,  
vehicles approaching from  
the left and right of the front  
of the vehicle can be  
When assistance to a detectable  
object crossing the road or assis-  
tance to a detectable object on the  
side of the road is performed and  
the system determines the driver  
is not holding the steering wheel  
detected and the driver  
informed of these vehicles.  
If no operations are detected for a  
certain amount of time, a buzzer will  
sound, the warning will operate.  
This warning may also operate if the  
driver only operates steering wheel  
a small amount continuously.  
FCTA system control  
When the system detects a  
vehicle approaching from the  
left or right in front of your  
vehicle when approaching an  
intersection, a notification will  
be displayed.  
Warning operation after preced-  
ing vehicle deceleration assis-  
tance has ended  
After preceding vehicle decelera-  
tion assistance has ended, if the  
driver does not operate the brake  
pedal or accelerator pedal and the  
vehicle approaches the preceding  
vehicle, the display will flash and a  
buzzer will sound to urge the driver  
to decelerate. If the system deter-  
mines that the driver is operating the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal,  
the warning will be canceled.  
When the system determines  
that your vehicle may be  
about to enter an intersection  
even though a vehicle is  
approaching from the left or  
right in front of your vehicle, a  
buzzer will sound and a mes-  
sage will be displayed to urge  
you to depress the brake  
pedal.  
• Multi-information display  
327  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
your vehicle  
The accelerator pedal is not being  
strongly depressed  
The brake pedal is not being  
strongly depressed  
Situations in which the system  
may operate even though no  
vehicles are approaching  
In certain situations, such as the fol-  
lowing, the system may operate  
even though no vehicles are  
approaching:  
WARNING  
For safe use  
When approaching objects on the  
roadside, such as guardrails, traf-  
fic signs, utility poles, street lights,  
trees, tall grass, walls, etc.  
Driving safely is solely the respon-  
sibility of the driver. Pay careful  
attention to the surrounding con-  
ditions in order to ensure safe  
driving. The FCTA system is a  
supplementary system that  
informs the driver of vehicles  
approaching from the left and  
right of the front of the vehicle.  
When passing an object on the  
side of the road, such as a parked  
vehicle  
When a vehicle or pedestrian is  
approaching from the left or right  
in front of your vehicle in the dis-  
tance  
5
Over-reliance on this system may  
lead to an accident resulting in  
death or serious injury. The  
details of the warning display may  
differ from the actual traffic condi-  
tions. Although the warning dis-  
play will stop being displayed after  
a certain amount of time, this  
does not necessarily indicate that  
there are no longer any vehicles  
or pedestrians around your vehi-  
cle.  
When a vehicle or pedestrian is  
moving within a parking spot, etc.,  
next to the lane your vehicle is in  
When a pedestrian or bicyclist is  
approaching on a sidewalk  
When a vehicle or pedestrian is  
moving away from your vehicle  
When an approaching vehicle is  
decelerating or stops  
When an approaching vehicle  
makes a left/right turn immediately  
in front of your vehicle  
FCTA system operating condi-  
tions  
When a pedestrian is approaching  
your vehicle  
The system will operate when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
When an oncoming vehicle makes  
a right/left turn  
A shift position other than P or R is  
selected  
When your vehicle enters an inter-  
section before a vehicle  
approaching from the left or right  
in front of your vehicle  
The vehicle speed is approxi-  
mately 10 mph (15 km/h) or less  
A vehicle is approaching from the  
left or right in front of your vehicle  
at a speed between approximately  
7 to 37 mph (10 to 60 km/h)  
When stopped at traffic light and a  
vehicle approaches from the left  
or right in front of your vehicle  
There are no vehicles in front of  
When making a left/right turn in  
328  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
front of an approaching vehicle  
Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly: P.289  
Situations in which some or all of  
the functions of the system cannot  
operate: P.291  
Changing FCTA settings  
The FCTA can be  
enabled/disabled through a  
When an oncoming vehicle  
approaches and passes  
customize setting. (P.627)  
When being overtaken by another  
vehicle  
The following settings of the  
FCTA can be changed  
through customize settings.  
(P.627)  
When driving next to another vehi-  
cle or a pedestrian  
When a vehicle or pedestrian  
approaches the side of your vehi-  
cle  
Situations in which the system  
may not operate properly  
In situations such as the following, a  
vehicle may not be detected by a  
front side radar sensor and the sys-  
tem may not operate properly:  
If an approaching vehicle moves  
suddenly (sudden steering, accel-  
eration, deceleration, etc.)  
If a vehicle is approaching from  
the left or right of the front of your  
vehicle diagonally  
When a vehicle is approaching  
from the left or right in front of your  
vehicle in the distance  
When there is an object between  
your vehicle and an approaching  
vehicle  
When several vehicles are  
approaching with little space  
between them  
329  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
detects a sign or information  
of a sign is available from the  
navigation system, the sign  
will be displayed on the dis-  
play.  
RSA (Road Sign  
*
Assist)  
*
: If equipped  
The RSA system detects  
specific road signs using  
the front camera and/or nav-  
igation system (when speed  
limit information is avail-  
able) and warns the driver  
via displays and buzzers.  
Multiple signs can be dis-  
played.  
Depending on the specifications of  
the vehicle, the number of dis-  
played signs may be limited.  
Operating conditions of sign  
display  
WARNING  
Signs will be displayed when the fol-  
lowing conditions are met:  
For safe use  
Driving safely is solely the  
responsibility of the driver. Pay  
careful attention to the sur-  
rounding conditions in order to  
ensure safe driving.  
The system has detected a sign  
In the following situations, a dis-  
played sign may stop being dis-  
played:  
5
When a new sign has not been  
detected for a certain distance  
Do not rely solely upon the  
RSA. The RSA assists the  
driver by providing road sign  
information, but it is not a  
replacement for the driver’s own  
vision and awareness. Driving  
safely is solely the responsibility  
of the driver. Pay careful atten-  
tion to the surrounding condi-  
tions in order to ensure safe  
driving.  
When the system determines that  
the road being driven on has  
changed, such as after a left or  
right turn  
Situations in which the display  
function may not operate prop-  
erly  
In the following situations, the RSA  
system may not operate properly  
and may not detect signs or may  
display the incorrect sign. However,  
this does not indicate a malfunction.  
Situations in which the RSA  
should not be used  
When it is necessary to disable  
the system: P.284  
When a sign is dirty, faded, tilted  
or bent  
Situations in which the sys-  
tem may not operate properly  
When the contrast of an electronic  
sign is low  
Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly:  
P.289  
When all or part of a sign is hidden  
by a tree, utility pole, etc.  
When a sign is detected by the  
front camera for a short amount of  
time  
Display Function  
When the driving state (turning,  
changing lanes, etc.) is judged  
incorrectly  
When the front camera  
330  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When a sign is immediately after a  
freeway junction or in an adjacent  
lane just before merging  
Operating conditions of the  
notification functions  
Excess speed notification function  
When stickers are attached to the  
rear of a preceding vehicle  
This function will operate when the  
following condition is met:  
• A speed limit road sign is recog-  
nized by the system.  
When a sign similar to a system  
compatible sign is detected as a  
system compatible sign  
When a speed limit sign for a  
frontage road is within detection  
range of the front camera  
No entry notification function  
This function will operate when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
• More than one no entry road signs  
are recognized by the system  
simultaneously.  
• The vehicle is passing between no  
entry road signs recognized by the  
system.  
When driving around a round-  
about  
When a sign intended for trucks,  
etc. is detected  
When the navigation system map  
data is out of date  
When the navigation system can-  
not be used  
Types of road signs sup-  
ported  
In this case, the speed limit signs  
displayed on the multi-information  
display and navigation system dis-  
play may differ.  
The following types of road  
signs can be displayed.  
However, non-standard or recently  
introduced traffic signs may not be  
displayed.  
Notification function  
In the following situations, the  
RSA system will output a warn-  
ing to notify the driver.  
Speed limit  
If the vehicle speed exceeds  
the speed warning threshold  
of the speed limit sign dis-  
played on the display, the  
sign display will be empha-  
sized and a buzzer will sound.  
Do Not Enter  
No U-turn  
When the RSA system  
detects a do not enter sign  
and determines that the vehi-  
cle has entered a no-entry  
area, the do not enter sign  
displayed on the display will  
flash and a buzzer will sound.  
No Turn On Red  
331  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Dynamic radar cruise  
control  
Stop  
This dynamic radar cruise  
control detects the pres-  
ence of vehicles ahead,  
determines the current vehi-  
cle-to-vehicle distance, and  
operates to maintain a suit-  
able distance from the vehi-  
cle ahead. The desired  
vehicle-to-vehicle distance  
can be set by operating the  
vehicle-to-vehicle distance  
switch.  
Yield  
Warning  
Depending on the specifica-  
tions of the vehicle, signs may  
be displayed overlapping.  
Changing RSA settings  
The following settings of the  
RSA can be changed through  
customize settings. (P.628)  
Use the dynamic radar  
cruise control only on high-  
ways and expressways.  
5
WARNING  
For safe use  
Driving safely is solely the  
responsibility of the driver. Do  
not overly rely on this system,  
and pay careful attention to the  
surrounding conditions in order  
to ensure safe driving.  
The dynamic radar cruise con-  
trol provides driving assistance  
to reduce the driver’s burden.  
However, there are limitations  
to the assistance provided.  
Read the following items care-  
fully. Do not overly rely on this  
system and always drive care-  
fully.  
Conditions under which the sys-  
tem may not operate correctly:  
P.337  
332  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
The dynamic radar cruise control  
WARNING  
determines whether the distance  
between the driver’s own vehicle  
and a designated preceding vehi-  
cle is within a set range. It is not  
capable of making any other type  
of judgement. Therefore, it is  
absolutely necessary for the  
driver to remain vigilant and to  
determine whether or not there is  
a possibility of danger.  
Set the speed appropriately  
according to the speed limit,  
traffic flow, road conditions,  
weather conditions, etc. The  
driver is responsible for confirm-  
ing the set speed.  
Even if the system is operating  
correctly, the condition of a pre-  
ceding vehicle as recognized by  
the driver and detected by the  
system may differ. Therefore, it  
is necessary for the driver to  
pay attention, assess risks, and  
ensure safety. Over-reliance on  
this system to drive the vehicle  
safely may lead to an accident  
resulting in death or serious  
injury.  
Details of support provided for  
the driver’s operation  
The dynamic radar cruise control  
does not include functions which  
will prevent or avoid collisions  
with vehicles ahead of your vehi-  
cle. Therefore, if there is ever any  
possibility of danger, the driver  
must take immediate and direct  
control of the vehicle and act  
appropriately in order to ensure  
safety.  
Precautions for the driving  
assist systems  
Observe the following precau-  
tions, as there are limitations to  
the assistance provided by the  
system. Over-reliance on this sys-  
tem may lead to an accident  
resulting in death or serious  
injury.  
Situations in which the  
dynamic radar cruise control  
should not be used  
Do not use the dynamic radar  
cruise control in the following situ-  
ations. As the system will not be  
able to provide appropriate con-  
trol, using it may lead to an acci-  
dent resulting in death or serious  
injury.  
Details of support provided for  
the driver’s vision  
The dynamic radar cruise control  
is only intended to help the driver  
in determining the distance  
between the driver’s own vehicle  
and a designated preceding vehi-  
cle. It is not a system which allows  
for careless or inattentive driving,  
and is not a system which assists  
in poor visibility conditions.  
Roads where there are pedes-  
trians, cyclists, etc.  
When driving on a highway or  
expressway entrance or exit  
When the approach warning  
sounds frequently  
The driver must pay attention to  
their surroundings, even when the  
vehicle stops.  
Situations in which the sensors  
may not operate properly:  
P.289  
Details of support provided for  
the driver’s judgement  
Situations in which the lane may  
not be detected: P.291  
333  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Basic functions  
5
A
Constant speed cruising  
When there are no vehicles ahead  
The vehicle drives at the speed set by the driver.  
If the set vehicle speed is exceeded while driving down a hill, the set vehicle  
speed display will blink and a buzzer will sound.  
B
Deceleration and follow-up cruising  
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set vehicle  
speed is detected  
When a vehicle is detected driving ahead of your vehicle, the vehicle auto-  
matically decelerates and if a greater reduction in vehicle speed is neces-  
sary, the brakes are applied (the stop lights will come on at this time). The  
vehicle is controlled to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the  
driver, in accordance with changes in the speed of the preceding vehicle. If  
vehicle deceleration is not sufficient and the vehicle approaches the vehicle  
ahead, the approach warning will sound.  
C
Acceleration  
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower  
than the set vehicle speed  
The vehicle accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached and then  
resumes constant speed cruising.  
D
Starting off  
334  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
If a preceding vehicle stops, the vehicle will also stop (controlled  
stop). After the preceding vehicle starts off, pressing the “RES”  
switch or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up  
cruising (start off operation). If a start off operation is not performed,  
the controlled stop will continue.  
Vehicles with Traffic Jam Assist: While driving on a highway or  
expressway, if a preceding vehicle stops, your vehicle will stop  
accordingly. On some highways and expressways, if the system  
determines that the preceding vehicle starts off within approximately  
3 minutes of stopping, a buzzer will sound and a message will be  
displayed on the multi-information display to notify the driver, and  
your vehicle will start off accordingly following the preceding vehicle.  
(Extended resume time)  
A
Driving assist mode select  
switch  
System components  
Meter display  
B
C
D
E
F
Driving assist switch  
“+” switch/“RES” switch  
“-” switch  
Cancel switch  
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance  
switch  
Using the dynamic radar  
cruise control  
A
Multi-information display  
B
Set vehicle speed  
Setting the vehicle speed  
C
Indicators  
1 Press the driving assist mode  
select switch to select  
dynamic radar cruise control.  
Switches  
The dynamic radar cruise control  
B
C
F
D
E
335  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
indicator will illuminate.  
1 Increase set vehicle speed  
2 Decrease set vehicle speed  
2 Using the accelerator pedal,  
accelerate or decelerate to  
the desired vehicle speed  
(approximately 20 mph [30  
km/h] or more), and press the  
driving assist switch to set  
the set vehicle speed.  
Short press adjustment: Press the  
switch  
Long press adjustment: Press and  
hold the switch until the desired set  
vehicle speed is reached.  
The set vehicle speed will  
increase or decrease as follows:  
The set vehicle speed will be dis-  
played on the multi-information dis-  
play.  
5
For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii  
and Puerto Rico  
The vehicle speed at the moment  
the switch is released will be the set  
vehicle speed.  
Short press adjustment:  
Increases or decreases by 1  
mph (1.6 km/h) each time the  
switch is pressed  
Long press adjustment:  
Increases or decreases in 1  
mph (1.6 km/h) increments con-  
tinuously while the switch is  
pressed and held  
Except for the U.S. mainland,  
Hawaii and Puerto Rico  
Adjusting the set vehicle  
speed  
Short press adjustment: By 0.6  
mph (1 km/h) or 1.6 km/h (1  
mph) each time the switch is  
pressed  
Adjusting the set vehicle  
speed using the switches  
To change the set vehicle  
speed, press the “+” switch or “-”  
switch until the desired speed is  
displayed.  
Long press adjustment:  
Increases or decreases in 3.1  
mph (5 km/h) or 8 km/h (5 mph)  
336  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
increments continuously while  
the switch is pressed and held  
Increasing the set vehicle  
speed using the accelerator  
pedal  
1 Depress the accelerator  
pedal to accelerate the vehi-  
cle to the desired vehicle  
speed.  
Illus- Vehicle-  
tration to-vehi- Distance (Vehi-  
Num- cle dis- cle Speed: 60  
tance mph [100 km/h])  
Approximate  
2 Press the “+” switch.  
Canceling/resuming control  
ber  
1 Press the cancel switch or  
driving assist switch to cancel  
control.  
Extra  
long  
Approximately  
200 ft. (60 m)  
1
Approximately  
145 ft. (45 m)  
2
3
4
Long  
Medium  
Short  
Control will also be canceled if the  
brake pedal is depressed.  
(If the vehicle has been stopped by  
system control, depressing the  
brake pedal will not cancel control.)  
Approximately  
100 ft. (30 m)  
Approximately  
85 ft. (25 m)  
The actual vehicle-to-vehicle  
distance varies in accordance  
with the vehicle speed. Also,  
when the vehicle is stopped by  
system control, it will be stopped  
at a certain distance from the  
preceding vehicle, depending on  
the situation, regardless of the  
setting.  
2 Press the “RES” switch to  
resume control.  
Changing the vehicle-to-  
vehicle distance  
Operating conditions  
Each time the switch is pressed,  
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance  
setting will change as follows:  
The D shift position is selected.  
The desired set speed can be set  
when the vehicle speed is approx-  
imately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.  
• If the vehicle speed is set while  
driving at below approximately 20  
mph (30 km/h), the set vehicle  
speed will be approximately 20  
mph (30 km/h).  
If a preceding vehicle is  
detected, the preceding vehicle  
A
mark  
will be displayed.  
337  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
• If the vehicle speed is set while  
• The driver’s seat belt is unfas-  
tened  
• The driver’s door is opened  
• Approximately 3 minutes have  
elapsed since the vehicle was  
stopped  
driving at a speed that exceeds  
the system’s upper limit, the set  
vehicle speed will be the system’s  
upper limit.  
Accelerating after setting the  
vehicle speed  
The parking brake may be actived  
automatically.  
As with normal driving, acceleration  
can be performed by depressing the  
accelerator pedal. After accelerat-  
ing, the vehicle will return to the set  
vehicle speed. However, while in  
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control  
mode, the vehicle speed may  
decrease to below the set vehicle  
speed in order to maintain the dis-  
tance from the preceding vehicle.  
Situations in which some or all of  
the functions of the system cannot  
operate: P.291  
Dynamic radar cruise control  
system warning messages and  
buzzers  
For safe use: P.284  
Preceding vehicles that the sen-  
sor may not detect correctly  
When the vehicle is stopped by  
system control during follow-up  
cruising  
In the following situations, depend-  
ing on the conditions, if the system  
cannot provide sufficient decelera-  
tion or acceleration is necessary,  
operate the brake pedal or accelera-  
tor pedal.  
When the “RES” switch is pressed  
while the vehicle is stopped by  
system control, if the preceding  
vehicle starts off within approxi-  
mately 3 seconds, follow-up cruis-  
ing will resume.  
5
As the sensor may not be able to  
correctly detect these types of vehi-  
cles, the approach warning  
(P.338) may not operate.  
When a vehicle cuts in front of  
your vehicle or changes lanes  
away from your vehicle extremely  
slowly or quickly  
If the preceding vehicle starts off  
within approximately 3 seconds of  
the vehicle being stopped by sys-  
tem control, follow-up cruising will  
resume.  
Automatic cancellation of vehi-  
cle-to-vehicle distance control  
mode  
When changing lanes  
When a preceding vehicle is driv-  
ing at a low speed  
In the following situations, vehicle-  
to-vehicle distance control mode will  
be canceled automatically:  
When a vehicle is stopped in the  
same lane as the vehicle  
When the brake control or output  
restriction control of a driving sup-  
port system operates  
When a motorcycle is traveling in  
the same lane as the vehicle  
(For example: Pre-Collision Sys-  
tem, drive-start control)  
Conditions under which the  
system may not operate cor-  
rectly  
When the parking brake has been  
operated  
In the following situations, operate  
the brake pedal (or accelerator  
pedal, depending on the situation)  
as necessary.  
When the vehicle is stopped by  
system control on a steep incline  
When any of the following are  
detected while the vehicle is  
stopped by system control:  
As the sensor may not be able to  
correctly detect a vehicle, the sys-  
tem may not operate properly.  
338  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When a preceding vehicle brakes  
suddenly  
Warnings may not occur  
when  
When changing lanes at low  
speeds, such as in a traffic jam  
In the following situations, the  
warning may not operate even  
though the vehicle-to-vehicle  
distance is short.  
Conditions for extended  
resume time (Vehicles with  
Traffic Jam Assist)  
Extended resume time is activated  
when all of the following conditions  
are satisfied:  
When the preceding vehicle is  
traveling at the same speed  
or faster than your vehicle  
The connected service that  
Toyota provides is subscribed to.  
Contact your Toyota dealer for  
details.  
When the preceding vehicle is  
traveling at an extremely low  
speed  
The vehicle is driving on a vehicle-  
only road, such as an express-  
way.  
Immediately after the vehicle  
speed has been set  
There is a preceding vehicle and  
the system is able to detect it.  
When the accelerator pedal is  
depressed  
No vehicle interruptions occur.  
The preceding vehicle has not  
been replaced.  
Curve speed reduction  
function  
Clearance sonar and FCTA are  
not detecting the object in front of  
you.  
When a curve is detected, the  
vehicle speed will begin being  
reduced. When the curve ends,  
the vehicle speed reduction will  
end.  
The driver monitor judges that the  
driver is looking forward.  
The steering wheel has not been  
operated.  
The brake pedal has not been  
operated.  
Depending on the situation, the  
vehicle speed will then return to the  
set vehicle speed.  
Approach warning  
In situations where the vehicle  
approaches a preceding vehicle  
and the system cannot provide  
sufficient deceleration, such as  
if a vehicle cuts in front of the  
vehicle, a warning display will  
flash and a buzzer will sound to  
alert the driver. Depress the  
brake pedal to ensure appropri-  
ate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.  
In situations where vehicle-to-vehi-  
cle distance control needs to oper-  
ate, such as when a preceding  
vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle,  
the curve speed reduction function  
will be canceled.  
339  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
erate up to the set speed to  
assist in overtaking.  
The system’s recognition of  
which lane is the passing lane  
may be based solely on the  
location of the steering wheel in  
the vehicle (left-hand drive/right-  
hand drive). If the vehicle is  
driven in a location where the  
passing lane is on the opposite  
side of that where the vehicle  
was originally sold, the vehicle  
may accelerate when the turn  
signal lever is operated away  
from the passing lane. (e.g. The  
vehicle was manufactured for a  
right-hand traffic location, but is  
being driven in a left-hand traffic  
location. The vehicle may accel-  
erate when the turn signal lever  
is operated to the right.)  
Situations in which the curve  
speed reduction function may  
not operate  
In situations such as the following,  
the curve speed reduction function  
may not operate:  
When the vehicle is being driven  
around a gentle curve  
When the accelerator pedal is  
being depressed  
When the vehicle is being driven  
around an extremely short curve  
5
Driver Monitor support  
function (if equipped)  
If your vehicle is being driven at  
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h)  
or more and the lane is changed  
to that with a vehicle traveling  
slower than your vehicle, when  
the turn signal lever is operated  
the vehicle will gradually decel-  
erate to assist in changing  
lanes.  
While a warning of the driver  
monitor is being displayed, the  
vehicle acceleration will be  
restrained.  
When the warning of the driver  
monitor disappears, the restrained  
acceleration control will end.  
Support for lane change  
Changing Dynamic radar  
cruise control settings  
If your vehicle is being driven at  
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h)  
or more and a lane change to  
the passing lane is performed,  
when the turn signal lever is  
operated and the lane is  
The settings of Dynamic radar  
cruise control can be changed  
through customize settings.  
(P.628)  
changed, the vehicle will accel-  
340  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Display and system operation state  
The operating state of Dynamic radar cruise control is indicated.  
Indicator  
Multi-information display  
Situation  
Dynamic  
Vehicle-to-vehicle  
distance setting:  
Gray  
radar cruise  
control being  
OFF  
White  
Vehicle-to-vehicle  
distance setting:  
Blue  
Constant  
speed cruis-  
ing  
Green  
Set vehicle speed:  
Green  
Vehicle-to-vehicle  
distance setting:  
Blue  
Follow-up  
cruising  
Set vehicle speed:  
Green  
Green  
Preceding vehicle:  
White  
Vehicle-to-vehicle  
distance setting: Yel-  
low flashing  
Approach  
warning  
Set vehicle speed:  
Green  
Green  
Preceding vehicle:  
Yellow flashing  
341  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Indicator  
Multi-information display  
Vehicle-to-vehicle  
Situation  
distance setting:  
Gray  
Accelerating  
with the  
accelerator  
pedal  
Set vehicle speed:  
White  
Green  
Preceding vehicle:  
Gray  
Set vehicle speed: Set vehicle  
Green in reverse  
display  
speed being  
exceeded  
Green  
Vehicle-to-vehicle  
distance setting:  
Gray  
Vehicle in  
Set vehicle speed: controlled  
White  
5
stop  
Green  
Preceding vehicle:  
Gray  
342  
Cruise control  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Vehicle speed may exceed the  
set speed when driving down a  
steep hill.  
The vehicle can be driven at  
a set speed even if the  
accelerator pedal is not  
depressed.  
When it is necessary to disable  
the system: P.284  
System Components  
Use the cruise control only  
on highways and express-  
ways.  
Meter display  
WARNING  
For safe use  
Driving safely is solely the  
responsibility of the driver.  
Therefore, do not overly rely on  
this system. The driver is solely  
responsible for paying attention  
to the vehicle’s surroundings  
and driving safely.  
A
Set vehicle speed  
Set the speed appropriately  
according to the speed limit,  
traffic flow, road conditions,  
weather conditions, etc. The  
driver is responsible for confirm-  
ing the set speed.  
B
Cruise control indicator  
Switches  
Situations in which cruise  
control should not be used  
Do not use the cruise control in  
the following situations. As the  
system will not be able to provide  
appropriate control, using it may  
lead to an accident resulting in  
death or serious injury.  
On roads with sharp bends  
On winding roads  
A
Driving assist mode select  
switch  
B
On slippery roads, such as  
those covered with rain, ice or  
snow  
Driving assist switch  
C
“+” switch / “RES” switch  
D
On steep downhills, or where  
there are sudden changes  
between sharp up and down  
gradients  
“-” switch  
E
Cancel switch  
343  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
desired speed is displayed.  
Using the cruise control  
Setting the vehicle speed  
1 Press the driving assist mode  
select switch to select cruise  
control.  
The cruise control indicator will illu-  
minate.  
1 Increase set vehicle speed  
2 Decrease set vehicle speed  
The set vehicle speed will increase  
or decrease as follows:  
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6  
km/h) or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) each  
time the switch is pressed  
Large adjustment: Increases con-  
tinuously while the switch is  
pressed and held  
2 Using the accelerator pedal,  
accelerate to the desired  
vehicle speed (approxi-  
mately 20 mph [30 km/h] or  
more), and press the driving  
assist switch to set the set  
vehicle speed.  
5
Increasing the set vehicle  
speed using the accelerator  
pedal  
1 Depress the accelerator  
pedal to accelerate the vehi-  
cle to the desired vehicle  
speed.  
The vehicle speed at the moment  
the switch is released will be the set  
vehicle speed.  
2 Press the “+” switch.  
Canceling/resuming control  
1 Press the cancel switch or  
driving assist switch to cancel  
control.  
Control will also be canceled if the  
Adjusting the set speed  
Adjusting the set vehicle  
speed using the switches  
To change the set vehicle speed,  
press the “+” or “-” switch until the  
344  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
brake pedal is depressed.  
control will be canceled automati-  
cally:  
When the vehicle speed drops  
approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)  
or more below the set vehicle  
speed  
When the vehicle speed drops  
below approximately 20 mph (30  
km/h)  
When the brake control or output  
restriction control of a driving sup-  
port system operates (For exam-  
ple: PCS, drive-start control)  
2 Press the “RES” switch to  
resume control.  
When the parking brake has been  
operated  
Automatic cancellation of the  
cruise control  
Situations in which some or all of  
the functions of the system cannot  
operate: P.291  
In the following situations, the cruise  
Display and system operation state  
The operating state of cruise control is indicated.  
Indicator  
Multi-information display  
Blank  
Situation  
Cruise con-  
trol being  
OFF  
White  
Constant  
speed cruis-  
ing  
Set vehicle speed:  
Green  
Green  
Green  
Set vehicle speed: Set vehicle  
Green in reverse  
display  
speed being  
exceeded  
345  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Emergency Driving  
Stop System  
WARNING  
For safe use  
Driving safely is solely the  
responsibility of the driver. Pay  
careful attention to the sur-  
rounding conditions in order to  
ensure safe driving. The emer-  
gency driving stop system is  
designed to provide support in  
an emergency where it is diffi-  
cult for the driver to continue  
driving, such as if they have had  
a medical emergency. It is not  
designed to support driving  
while drowsy or in poor physical  
health, or inattentive driving.  
The emergency driving stop  
system is a system which  
automatically decelerates  
and stops the vehicle within  
its lane if the driver  
becomes unable to continue  
driving the vehicle, such as  
if they have suffered a medi-  
cal emergency, etc.  
During LTA (Lane Tracing  
Assist) control, if the sys-  
tem does not detect driving  
operations, such as if the  
driver is not holding the  
steering wheel, and deter-  
mines the driver is not  
responsive, the vehicle will  
be decelerated and stopped  
within its current lane to  
help avoid a collision or  
reduce the impact of a colli-  
sion.  
Although the emergency driv-  
ing stop system is designed to  
decelerate the vehicle within its  
lane to help avoid or help  
reduce the impact of a collision  
if the system determines that it  
is difficult for the driver to con-  
tinue driving, its effectiveness  
may change according to vari-  
ous conditions. Therefore, it  
may not always be able to  
5
achieve the same level of per-  
formance. Also, if the operating  
conditions are not met, this  
function will not operate.  
After the emergency driving  
stop system operates, if driving  
becomes possible again, imme-  
diately begin driving again or, if  
necessary, park the vehicle on  
the shoulder of the road and set  
a warning reflector and flare to  
warn other drivers of your  
The vehicle will also decel-  
erate/stop during the Traffic  
Jam Assist (if equipped)  
controls, when no driver’s  
response to the vehicle’s  
warning to hold the steering  
wheel is detected.  
stopped vehicle.  
After this system operates, pas-  
sengers should attend to the  
driver as necessary and take  
appropriate hazard prevention  
measures, such as moving to a  
place where safety can be  
ensured, such as the shoulder  
of the road or behind a guard-  
rail.  
346  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
or more  
WARNING  
During the Traffic Jam Assist con-  
This system detects the condi-  
tion of the driver through the  
operation of the steering wheel.  
This system may operate if the  
driver is aware but intentionally  
and continuously does not oper-  
ate the vehicle. Also, the system  
may not operate if it cannot  
trols (if equipped), the system may  
operate at below 30 mph (50 km/h).  
Operation cancelation condi-  
tions  
In the following situations, system  
operation will be canceled:  
determine that the driver is not  
responsive, such as if they are  
leaning on the steering wheel.  
When LTA control has been can-  
celed (the LTA switch has been  
pressed, etc.)  
When the dynamic radar cruise  
Situations in which the driver  
monitor may not operate prop-  
erly: P.291  
control has been canceled  
When driver operations are  
detected (the steering wheel is  
held, the brake pedal, accelerator  
pedal, parking brake, emergency  
flasher switch, or turn signal lever  
is operated)  
Summary of the system  
Operation of this system is sep-  
arated into 4 control states.  
Through control state “warning  
phase 1” and “warning phase 2”,  
the system determines if the  
driver is aware and responsive  
while outputting a warning and  
controlling the vehicle speed. If  
the system determines the  
driver is not responsive, it will  
operate in control state “deceler-  
ation stop phase” and “stop hold  
phase” and decelerate and stop  
the vehicle. It will then operate  
continuously in “stop hold  
When the driving assist switch is  
pressed while in the stop and hold  
phase  
When the power switch has been  
turned from ON to off  
Situations in which some or all of  
the functions of the system cannot  
operate: P.291  
LTA control when operation is  
canceled  
When emergency driving stop sys-  
tem operation is canceled, LTA con-  
trol may also be canceled.  
Warning phase 1  
If driving operations are not  
detected after the hands off  
steering wheel warning oper-  
ates, a buzzer will sound inter-  
mittently and a message will be  
displayed to warn the driver, and  
the system will judge if the driver  
is responsive or not. If driving  
operations, such as holding the  
steering wheel, are not per-  
phase”.  
Operating conditions  
This system operates when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
When the LTA is on  
Or during the Traffic Jam Assist (if  
equipped) controls  
When the vehicle speed is  
approximately 30 mph (50 km/h)  
347  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
erate and stop. After the vehicle  
stops, the system will enter the  
stop and hold phase.  
formed within a certain amount  
of time, the system will enter  
warning phase 2.  
Vehicles with a driver monitor  
camera: Depending on the type  
of detection of the driver’s unre-  
sponsiveness, the system may  
skip warning phase 1 and start  
the control of warning phase 2.  
Stop hold phase  
After the vehicle is stopped, the  
parking brake will be applied  
automatically. After entering the  
stop and hold phase, the buzzer  
will continue sounding continu-  
ously and the emergency flash-  
ers (hazard lights) will flash to  
warn other drivers of the emer-  
gency.  
Warning phase 2  
After entering warning phase 2,  
a buzzer will sound in short  
intervals and a message will be  
displayed to warn the driver, and  
the vehicle will slowly deceler-  
ate. If driving operations, such  
as holding the steering wheel,  
are not performed within a cer-  
tain amount of time, the system  
will determine that the driver is  
not responsive and enter the  
deceleration stop phase.  
Restricted functions after the  
operation is canceled  
After shifting to the deceleration  
stop phase, the following functions  
will not be available until the hybrid  
system is re-started even though  
the emergency driving stop system  
is canceled:  
5
LTA  
LCA (if equipped)  
Traffic Jam Assist (if equipped)  
The audio system will be muted  
until the driver becomes respon-  
sive.  
When the vehicle is decelerat-  
ing, the brake lights may illumi-  
nate, depending on the road  
conditions, etc.  
Deceleration stop phase  
After entering the deceleration  
stop phase, a buzzer will sound  
continuously and a message will  
be displayed to warn the driver,  
and the vehicle will slowly decel-  
348  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
*
Traffic Jam Assist  
Emergency Driving Stop  
System  
*
: If equipped  
P.345  
Traffic Jam Assist is a sys-  
tem which, through confir-  
mation of the conditions by  
the driver, provides lane  
keeping, accelerating/decel-  
erating, stopping, and start-  
ing off support on some  
highways and express-  
ways. Also, in an emer-  
gency, the system can  
decelerate and stop, to help  
avoid a collision or help  
reduce the impact of a colli-  
sion.  
Extended resume time of  
dynamic radar cruise con-  
trol  
P.333  
Traffic Jam Assist Func-  
tion  
The Traffic Jam Assist function,  
through confirmation of the con-  
ditions by the driver, provides  
lane keeping, accelerat-  
ing/decelerating and stopping  
support on some highways and  
expressways.  
Precautions for use  
P.289  
This function is operable when  
all of the operation conditions  
are met. When this function is  
operating, it is possible to take  
your hands off of the steering  
wheel.  
Sensors that support the  
Traffic Jam Assist  
Sensors which detect the sur-  
rounding conditions (P.286)  
Sensors which detect the  
driver condition (P.286)  
Before using the Traffic Jam Assist  
function, familiarize yourself with  
the content of the dynamic radar  
cruise control and the LTA (Lane  
Tracing Assist).  
Situations in which some or all  
of the functions of the system  
cannot operate  
P.291  
Changes in brake operation  
sound and pedal response  
Make sure that the driver steers the  
vehicle when entering a service  
area/parking area or toll gate, or  
when changing lanes.  
P.291  
Situations in which the driver  
monitor may not operate prop-  
erly  
Driver monitor camera  
recording  
When the operation of Traffic  
P.291  
349  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Jam Assist is started, the follow-  
ing message will be displayed:  
As the recognition performance  
and control performance of the  
Traffic Jam Assist function are  
limited, driver operation is nec-  
essary to ensure safety while  
the system is operating. Also,  
the steering assist of this sys-  
tem is designed to operate only  
for slow steering operations  
during a traffic jam. While this  
function is operating, the lane  
deviation control function of the  
LDA will not operate. If, for  
some reason, the vehicle is  
about to deviate the lane, it is  
the driver’s responsibility to  
drive properly.  
“Allow Driver Monitor Camera  
Recording?”  
When recording is approved, the  
system records images of the area  
around the driver in certain crash or  
near crash-like situations, such as  
an SRS airbag being deployed or  
the vehicle hitting an object on the  
road. (P.7)  
WARNING  
For safe use  
Even if Traffic Jam Assist is  
operating properly, the sur-  
rounding conditions as recog-  
nized by the driver and detected  
by the system may differ. There-  
fore, it is necessary for the  
driver to pay attention, assess  
risks, and ensure safety. Over-  
reliance on this system to drive  
the vehicle safely may lead to  
an accident resulting in death or  
serious injury.  
Driving safely is solely the  
responsibility of the driver. Do  
not overly rely on this system,  
and pay careful attention to the  
surrounding conditions in order  
to ensure safe driving.  
5
The Traffic Jam Assist function  
is not an automated driving sys-  
tem. This function provides the  
driver with information and driv-  
ing assistance according to the  
road shape and conditions, traf-  
fic conditions, and the condition  
of the driver themself. Always  
pay careful attention to the sur-  
rounding conditions as use of  
the system is the responsibility  
of the driver.  
While the Traffic Jam Assist  
function is operating, as driver  
operation may become neces-  
sary, the driver must ensure  
they have clear visibility of their  
surroundings.  
In certain situations, a message  
urging the driver to hold the  
steering wheel may be dis-  
played by the Traffic Jam Assist  
function. In this case, hold the  
steering wheel and drive the  
vehicle manually to ensure  
safety.  
Depending on the condition of  
the surrounding area, the road,  
or the driver, the Traffic Jam  
Assist function may not operate  
or operation may be sus-  
pended. Also, it may not always  
be able to achieve the same  
level of performance. Read the  
operating conditions of the func-  
tion carefully. Do not overly rely  
on this function and always  
drive carefully.  
350  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Situations in which the func-  
tion may not operate properly  
WARNING  
The Traffic Jam Assist function  
cannot detect the following  
objects. Operate the steering  
wheel, accelerator pedal, or  
brake pedal as necessary to  
avoid a collision. As the function  
will not be able to provide  
appropriate control, using it may  
lead to an accident resulting in  
death or serious injury.  
In situations such as the following,  
the Traffic Jam Assist function  
may not operate properly. Manu-  
ally operate the vehicle as neces-  
sary.  
When a sensor is splashed by  
water  
When the ambient temperature  
is high or low  
• Objects on the road surface  
When a vehicle cuts in front of  
your vehicle  
• Vehicles outside of a lane (such  
as on the shoulder of the road)  
When another lane merges into  
the lane in the same traveling  
direction as your vehicle  
• Potholes, cracks, ruts, or other  
road damage  
• Road construction zones  
When driving in low visibility  
conditions  
• Vehicles running in parallel with  
your vehicle or nearby walls  
When the vehicle posture is  
changing  
• Animals  
When the traction on the road  
surface differs greatly between  
the left and right side tires  
Situations in which Traffic  
Jam Assist Function should  
not be used  
When driving on an expressway  
with no median strips or when  
driving on an expressway  
Do not use Traffic Jam Assist  
Function in situations such as the  
following. As the system will not  
be able to provide appropriate  
control, using it may lead to an  
accident resulting in death or seri-  
ous injury.  
equipped with temporary  
median markers, such as poles.  
When there is a significant dif-  
ference in speed between your  
vehicle and the other vehicle  
When it is necessary to dis-  
able the system  
The map data has not been  
updated properly.  
P.284  
Situations in which the sen-  
sors may not operate prop-  
erly  
To prevent malfunction of the  
radar sensors  
P.286  
P.289  
To prevent malfunction of the  
Situations in which the lane  
front camera  
may not be detected  
P.287  
P.291  
351  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
(Pre-Collision System) is not set  
to off.  
WARNING  
Front camera installation area  
Customized setting of the dynamic  
radar cruise control (re-start time  
extension) is not set to off.  
on the windshield  
P.288  
Temporary cancelation of the  
function  
Operating conditions of the  
When the operating conditions are  
no longer met, a function may be  
temporarily canceled. However,  
when the operation conditions are  
met again, operation of the func-  
tion will automatically be restored.  
function  
This function is operable when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
The system detects lane lines and  
the path of preceding or surround-  
ing vehicles.  
If the operating conditions of a  
function are no longer met while  
the function is operating, a buzzer  
may sound with a display to indi-  
cate that the function has been  
temporarily canceled. If no driver’s  
responses to the indication are  
detected, the driver emergency  
stop assist function may operate.  
For types of display and action to  
be taken, see the page mentioned  
below. (P.352)  
The dynamic radar cruise control  
and the lane tracing assist are  
operating.  
The turn signal lever is not being  
operated.  
The vehicle is not being driven  
around a sharp curve.  
The vehicle is being driven in the  
center of a lane.  
5
The driver monitor camera is  
detecting that the driver is facing  
front of the vehicle.  
Driving operations during con-  
trolled driving:  
Accelerator pedal  
The vehicle is driving in traffic jam  
on a highway or expressway at  
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h)  
or less. (In some situations, such  
as when a traffic jam starts, this  
function may be operational at  
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h)  
or less.)  
As with normal driving, acceleration  
can be performed by depressing the  
accelerator pedal. When the accel-  
erator pedal is depressed at approx-  
imately 10 km/h (6 mph) or more,  
this function will be canceled.  
It is necessary to enter a con-  
nected services contract, provided  
by Toyota, to use these functions.  
For details, contact your Toyota  
dealer.  
Brake pedal  
As with normal driving, deceleration  
can be performed by depressing the  
brake pedal. However, controlled  
driving will be cancelled.  
The driver’s door is closed.  
Steering wheel  
The driver’s seat belt is fastened.  
As with normal driving, the steering  
wheel can be operated. If the steer-  
ing wheel is operated more than a  
certain amount, controlled driving  
will be cancelled.  
Customized setting of the Traffic  
Jam Assist is not set to off.  
Functions and components com-  
posing the system are in proper  
condition.  
Customized setting of the PCS  
352  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When a warning message is  
displayed  
Changing Traffic Jam  
Assist settings  
“TrafficJamAsst System Malfunc-  
tion Visit Your Dealer”  
The setting of Traffic Jam  
Assist can be enabled/dis-  
abled through a customize  
setting. (P.628)  
The Traffic Jam Assist function may  
not be operating properly.  
“TrafficJamAsst Unavailable Stop  
Assist Activated”  
The system temporarily cannot be  
used as the driver emergency stop  
assist function has operated.  
The setting of driver monitor  
camera recording can be  
enabled/disabled through a  
customize setting. (P.628)  
Display and system operation  
The following displays indicate the operating status of the Traffic  
Jam Assist function:  
Action to be  
taken  
Display  
Status  
Traffic Jam Assist function is operating  
Hold the  
steering  
wheel.  
Traffic Jam Assist function is about to end  
Traffic Jam Assist function has ended  
Gray  
Hold the  
steering  
wheel.  
Orange  
Manually  
Operation of either or both of dynamic radar operate the  
cruise control/LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)  
ended  
steering  
wheel imme-  
diately.  
Red  
353  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Action to be  
taken  
Display  
Status  
The driver  
mustoperate  
the steering  
wheel, accel-  
Indicates that driving actions are necessary erator pedal  
to cope with cut-in or other behavior of sur- and brake  
rounding vehicles  
pedal in  
Yellow  
accordance  
with the sur-  
rounding  
environment.  
Indicates that the recording function of the  
driver monitor camera is operational (Blinking  
of this icon indicates that recording is under-   
going, and constant illumination indicates  
ready for recording.)  
5
354  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
BSM (Blind Spot Moni-  
System components  
*
tor)  
*
: If equipped  
The Blind Spot Monitor is a  
system that uses rear side  
radar sensors installed on  
the inner side of the rear  
bumper on the left and right  
side to assist the driver in  
confirming safety when  
changing lanes.  
A
Meter control switches  
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor  
on/off.  
WARNING  
B
Outside rear view mirror indi-  
cators  
Cautions regarding the use of  
the system  
When a vehicle is detected in a  
blind spot of the outside rear view  
mirrors or approaching rapidly from  
behind into a blind spot, the outside  
rear view mirror indicator (P.152)  
on the detected side will illuminate.  
If the turn signal lever is operated  
toward the detected side, the out-  
side rear view mirror indicator will  
flash and a buzzer will sound.  
The driver is solely responsible  
for safe driving. Always drive  
safely, taking care to observe  
your surroundings.  
The Blind Spot Monitor is a sup-  
plementary function which alerts  
the driver that a vehicle is in a  
blind spot of the outside rear  
view mirrors or is approaching  
rapidly from behind into a blind  
spot. Do not overly rely on the  
Blind Spot Monitor. As the func-  
tion cannot judge if it is safe to  
change lanes, over reliance  
could lead to an accident result-  
ing in death or serious injury. As  
the system may not function  
correctly under certain condi-  
tions, the driver’s own visual  
confirmation of safety is neces-  
sary.  
C
Driving assist information  
indicator  
Illuminates when the Blind Spot  
Monitor is turned off. At this time, a  
message will be displayed on the  
multi-information display.  
Outside rear view mirror indica-  
tor visibility  
In strong sunlight, the outside rear  
view mirror indicator may be difficult  
to see.  
Buzzer  
If the volume setting of the audio  
system is high or the surrounding  
area is loud, it may be difficult to  
355  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
hear the buzzer.  
Do not subject a sensor or its  
surrounding area on the rear  
bumper to a strong impact.  
Customization  
Some functions can be customized.  
(P.618)  
If a sensor is moved even  
slightly off position, the system  
may malfunction and vehicles  
may not be detected correctly.  
In the following situations, have  
your vehicle inspected by your  
Toyota dealer.  
WARNING  
To ensure the system can  
operate properly  
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are  
installed behind the left and right  
sides of the rear bumper respec-  
tively. Observe the following to  
ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can  
operate correctly.  
• A sensor or its surrounding area  
is subject to a strong impact.  
• If the surrounding area of a sen-  
sor is scratched or dented, or  
part of them has become dis-  
connected.  
Keep the sensors and the sur-  
rounding areas on the rear  
bumper clean at all times.  
If a sensor or its surrounding  
area on the rear bumper is dirty  
or covered with snow, the Blind  
Spot Monitor may not operate  
and a warning message will be  
displayed. In this situation, clear  
off the dirt or snow and drive the  
vehicle with the operation condi-  
tions of the BSM function  
(P.357) satisfied for approxi-  
mately 10 minutes. If the warn-  
ing message does not  
disappear, have the vehicle  
inspected by your Toyota  
dealer.  
Do not disassemble the sensor.  
Do not modify the sensor or sur-  
rounding area on the rear  
bumper.  
If a sensor or the rear bumper  
needs to be removed/installed  
or replaced, contact your  
Toyota dealer.  
5
The sensors are likely to be  
affected by paint on the rear  
bumper. If the rear bumper is  
not repaired correctly, the Blind  
Spot Monitor may not operate  
with a warning message dis-  
played. If any paint repair is  
needed, contact your Toyota  
dealer.  
Turning the Blind Spot  
Monitor on/off  
The Blind Spot Monitor can be  
enabled/disabled through a cus-  
tomize setting. (P.618)  
Do not attach accessories,  
stickers (including transparent  
stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to  
a sensor or its surrounding area  
on the rear bumper.  
When the Blind Spot Monitor is  
off, the driving assist information  
indicator (P.152) will illumi-  
nate and a message will be dis-  
played on the multi-information  
Do not paint the surrounding  
area of a sensor on the rear  
bumper.  
356  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
display.  
turned to ON, the Blind Spot  
Monitor is enabled.  
Each time the power switch is  
Blind Spot Monitor operation  
Objects that can be detected while driving  
The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the  
following vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver  
of the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside  
rear view mirrors.  
A
Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the  
outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)  
B
Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that  
are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)  
Detection range while driving  
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.  
The range of each detection area is:  
A
Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of  
the vehicle*1  
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper*2  
B
357  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
C
D
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper  
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 230 ft. (70 m) from the rear  
bumper*3  
*1  
:The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side  
of the vehicle cannot be detected.  
*2  
*3  
:While the vehicle is to being overtaken, up to approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m)  
forward of the rear bumper will be detected.  
:The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the  
detected vehicle is, the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing  
the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.  
Situations in which the Blind  
Spot Monitor cannot detect  
vehicles  
The Blind Spot Monitor  
linked function  
The LDA (Lane Departure Alert)  
has a function that uses infor-  
mation of detected vehicles driv-  
ing in an adjacent lane. For  
The Blind Spot Monitor cannot  
detect the following vehicles and  
other objects:  
Small motorcycles, bicycles,  
*
pedestrians, etc.  
details about the function and its  
operating conditions, P.313.  
5
Vehicles traveling in the opposite  
direction  
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked  
vehicles and similar stationary  
The Blind Spot Monitor is oper-  
ational when  
*
objects  
The Blind Spot Monitor is opera-  
tional when all of the following con-  
ditions are met:  
Following vehicles that are in the  
*
same lane  
Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away  
*
The power switch is in ON.  
The Blind Spot Monitor is on.  
from your vehicle  
Vehicles which are being over-  
*
The shift position is in a position  
other than R.  
taken rapidly by your vehicle.  
*
The vehicle speed is approxi-  
mately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.  
: Depending on the conditions,  
detection of a vehicle and/or  
object may occur.  
The Blind Spot Monitor will  
detect a vehicle when  
Conditions in which a buzzer  
may not sound  
The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a  
vehicle present in the detection area  
in the following situations:  
In situations such as the following,  
while the turn signal lever is being  
operated, the indicator will flash but  
a buzzer may not sound.  
A vehicle in an adjacent lane over-  
takes your vehicle.  
You overtake a vehicle in an adja-  
cent lane slowly.  
When a second vehicle is  
detected while the turn signal  
lever is being held  
Another vehicle enters the detec-  
tion area when it changes lanes.  
When overtaking a vehicle in the  
358  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
adjacent lane at a much higher  
*
rear of the vehicle  
• When there is a significant differ-  
ence in height between your vehi-  
cle and the vehicle that enters the  
detection area  
speed than it  
*
: Depending on the situations, a  
buzzer may sound.  
• Immediately after the Blind Spot  
Monitor is turned on  
• When towing with the vehicle  
Conditions under which the  
system may not function cor-  
rectly  
Instances of the Blind Spot Moni-  
tor unnecessarily detecting a vehi-  
cle and/or object may increase in  
the following situations:  
• When the sensor is misaligned  
due to a strong impact to the sen-  
sor or its surrounding area  
• When the distance between your  
vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.  
that enters the detection area is  
short  
• When driving up and down con-  
secutive steep inclines, such as  
hills, dips in the road, etc.  
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or  
when driving on the edge of a  
lane, and a vehicle traveling in a  
lane other than the adjacent lanes  
enters the detection area  
• When driving on roads with sharp  
bends, consecutive curves, or  
uneven surfaces  
• When the tires are slipping or  
spinning  
• When the distance between your  
vehicle and a following vehicle is  
short  
• When an accessory (such as a  
bicycle carrier) is installed to the  
rear of the vehicle  
The Blind Spot Monitor may not  
detect vehicles correctly in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
• When the sensor is misaligned  
due to a strong impact to the sen-  
sor or its surrounding area  
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,  
etc. is covering the sensor or sur-  
rounding area on the rear bumper  
• When driving on a road surface  
that is wet with standing water  
during bad weather, such as  
heavy rain, snow, or fog  
• When multiple vehicles are  
approaching with only a small gap  
between each vehicle  
• When the distance between your  
vehicle and a following vehicle is  
short  
• When there is a significant differ-  
ence in speed between your vehi-  
cle and the vehicle that enters the  
detection area  
• When the difference in speed  
between your vehicle and another  
vehicle is changing  
• When a vehicle enters a detection  
area traveling at about the same  
speed as your vehicle  
• As your vehicle starts from a stop,  
a vehicle remains in the detection  
area  
• When towing with the vehicle  
• When driving up and down con-  
secutive steep inclines, such as  
hills, dips in the road, etc.  
• When driving on roads with sharp  
bends, consecutive curves, or  
uneven surfaces  
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or  
when driving on the edge of a  
lane, and the vehicle in an adja-  
cent lane is far away from your  
vehicle  
• When an accessory (such as a  
bicycle carrier) is installed to the  
359  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
*
Safe Exit Assist  
System components  
*
: If equipped  
The safe exit assist is a sys-  
tem that uses rear side  
radar sensors installed on  
the inner side of the rear  
bumper to help occupants  
judge if an approaching  
vehicle or bicycle may col-  
lide with a door when exit-  
ing, to help reduce the  
A
Multi-information display  
Turning the safe exit assist on/off.  
possibility of a collision.  
If collision with a door is likely and  
the door is opened, the door will be  
displayed on the multi-information  
display. Also, if a door is opened  
when an outside rear view mirror  
indicator is illuminated, a buzzer  
will sound as a warning.  
WARNING  
Cautions regarding the use of  
the system  
The driver is solely responsible  
for safe driving. Always drive  
safely, taking care to observe  
your surroundings.  
5
B
Outside rear view mirror indi-  
cators  
The safe exit assist is a supple-  
mentary system that, when the  
vehicle is stopped, informs  
occupants of the existence of  
approaching vehicles and bicy-  
cles. As this system alone can-  
not be used to judge safety,  
over-reliance on this system  
may lead to an accident result-  
ing in death or serious injury.  
When a vehicle or bicycle which  
may collide with a door (other than  
the back door) when opened is  
detected, the outside rear view mir-  
ror indicator (P.152) on the  
detected side will illuminate. If the  
door on the detected side is  
opened, the outside rear view mir-  
ror indicator will blink.  
In certain situations, this system  
may not function to its fullest  
extent. Therefore it is necessary  
for the occupants to visually  
check for safety directly and using  
the mirrors.  
C
Driving assist information  
indicator  
Illuminates when the safe exit  
assist is turned off. At this time, a  
message will be displayed on the  
multi-information display.  
D
Speakers  
When the outside rear view mirror  
indicator blinks, the driver is  
informed through voice guidance  
360  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
that the system has operated. After  
the notification through voice guid-  
ance is made, no more voice guid-  
ance notifications will be made  
again until the door is fully closed.  
tomize setting on the Multimedia  
Display and the hybrid system has  
been stopped  
When the parking assist volume  
setting on the Multimedia Display  
has been set to off  
*
: For each seating position, judg-  
Outside rear view mirror indica-  
tor visibility  
ment is made based on the open-  
ing and closing of a door, before  
driving for ingress and after driv-  
ing for egress.  
In strong sunlight, the outside rear  
view mirror indicator may be difficult  
to see.  
Buzzer  
Customization  
If the volume setting of the audio  
system is high or the surrounding  
area is loud, it may be difficult to  
hear the buzzer.  
Some functions can be customized.  
(P.618)  
WARNING  
Voice notifications  
To ensure the system can  
operate properly  
In the following situations, voice  
notifications will not be output:  
P.355  
When it is estimated that no occu-  
*
pants are on board  
Turning the safe exit  
assist system ON/OFF  
After opening a door and entering  
the vehicle, until the hybrid system  
is started  
The safe exit assist system can  
be enabled/disabled through a  
customize setting. (P.618)  
When 3 minutes or more have  
elapsed since the hybrid system  
was stopped  
When the language setting of the  
Multimedia Display has been set  
to a language that does not sup-  
port voice notifications  
When the safe exit assist is off,  
the driving assist information  
indicator will illuminate and a  
message will be displayed on  
the multi-information display.  
When all of the doors have been  
locked from outside the vehicle  
When a door remains open for 1  
minute or more after the hybrid  
system is stopped  
Each time the power switch is  
turned to ON, the safe exit  
assist is enabled.  
When the ACC mode (P.618)  
has been enabled through a cus-  
Safe exit assist operation  
Objects that can be detected by the safe exit assist  
When the safe exit assist detects the following vehicles or bicycles  
behind your vehicle using a rear side radar sensor, the occupants of  
the vehicle are informed through an outside rear view mirror indica-  
361  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
tor, buzzer, multi-information display, and voice notification.  
A
Vehicle or bicycle which has a high possibility of colliding with a  
door (other than the back door) when opened  
The safe exit assist detection areas  
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.  
5
Approximately 145 ft. (45 m) rearward from the front door*  
A
*
: The faster a vehicle or bicycle is approaching, the distance at which an  
outside rear view mirror indicator will illuminate or blink will become fur-  
ther.  
Safe exit assist is on  
The safe exit assist is opera-  
The vehicle is stopped.  
tional when  
The shift position is in a position  
other than R.  
The safe exit assist is operational  
when all of the following conditions  
are met:  
The safe exit assist will detect a  
vehicle when  
When the power switch is ON,  
less than 3 minutes have elapsed  
since the hybrid system was off, or  
less than 3 minutes have elapsed  
since a door was opened and  
someone has entered the vehicle  
(the time which operation is possi-  
ble may be extended if a door is  
opened and closed)  
The safe exit assist will detect a  
vehicle present in the detection area  
in the following situations:  
When the vehicle is stopped and a  
vehicle or bicycle, which is travel-  
ing parallel to the vehicle, is  
approaching within the area that a  
door opens (other than the back  
362  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
approaches from behind a nearby  
parked vehicle  
door)  
Conditions under which the  
system will not detect a vehicle  
• When an approaching vehicle or  
bicycle suddenly changes direc-  
tion  
• Immediately after a vehicle or  
bicycle starts moving  
Safe exit assist does not detect  
the following objects, vehicles,  
and bicycles:  
• Vehicles or bicycles which are  
*
• When the back door is open  
• When a bicycle carrier, ramp, or  
other accessory is installed to the  
back of the vehicle  
• When a parked vehicle, wall, sign,  
person or other stationary object  
is behind the vehicle  
approaching slowly  
• Vehicles or bicycles which are  
determined to have a low possibil-  
ity of colliding with a door (other  
*
than the back door) when opened  
• Vehicles or bicycles which are  
• When the vehicle is stopped at an  
angle to the road  
*
approaching from directly behind  
• Vehicles or bicycles which are  
• When a vehicle is traveling near  
an approaching vehicle or bicycle  
• When an approaching vehicle or  
bicycle is traveling along a station-  
ary object, such a wall or sign  
• When a vehicle or bicycle is  
approaching at high speed  
• When towing with the vehicle  
• When stopped on a steep slope  
• When stopped on a curve or at the  
exit of a curve  
*
approaching from the front  
• Guardrails, walls, signs, parked  
vehicles, and other stationary  
*
objects  
*
• Pedestrians, animals, etc.  
*
: Depending on the conditions,  
detection of a vehicle and/or  
object may occur.  
In situations such as the following,  
safe exit assist will not operate:  
• When 3 minutes or more have  
elapsed since the hybrid system  
off (the time which operation is  
possible may be extended if a  
door is opened and closed)  
• When your vehicle is not com-  
pletely stopped  
Instances of the safe exit assist  
unnecessarily detecting a vehicle  
and/or object may increase in the  
following situations:  
• When the sensor is misaligned  
due to a strong impact to the sen-  
sor or its surrounding area  
• When a vehicle or bicycle  
approaches from behind your  
vehicle at an angle  
Conditions under which the  
system may not function cor-  
rectly  
• When the vehicle is stopped at an  
angle to the road  
• When a vehicle or bicycle  
approaches from behind a parked  
vehicle at an angle  
• When a parked vehicle, wall, sign,  
person or other stationary object  
is behind the vehicle  
• When an approaching vehicle or  
bicycle suddenly changes direc-  
tion  
• When an approaching vehicle or  
bicycle is traveling along a station-  
ary object, such a wall or sign  
• When the back door is open  
• When a bicycle carrier, ramp, or  
other accessory is installed to the  
The safe exit assist may not  
detect vehicles correctly in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
• When the sensor is misaligned  
due to a strong impact to the sen-  
sor or its surrounding area  
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,  
etc. is covering the sensor or sur-  
rounding area on the rear bumper  
• When driving on a road surface  
that is wet with standing water  
during bad weather, such as  
heavy rain, snow, or fog  
• When a vehicle or bicycle  
363  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
back of the vehicle  
Intuitive park ing  
assist  
• When a vehicle or bicycle is  
approaching at high speed  
• When towing with the vehicle  
• When stopped on a steep slope  
• When stopped on a curve or at the  
exit of a curve  
The distance from your  
vehicle to objects, such as a  
wall, when parallel parking  
or maneuvering into a  
garage is measured by the  
sensors and communicated  
via the Multimedia Display  
and a buzzer. Always check  
the surrounding area when  
using this system.  
System components  
Types of sensors  
5
A
Front corner sensors  
B
Front center sensors  
C
Rear corner sensors  
D
Rear center sensors  
Front side sensors*  
E
Rear side sensors*  
F
*
: Vehicles with Advanced Park  
Display  
When the sensors detect an  
object, such as a wall, a graphic  
is shown on the Multimedia Dis-  
364  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
play depending on the position  
and distance to the object.  
even if the power switch is  
turned to ON after the power  
switch has been turned off.  
Display example:  
WARNING  
Cautions regarding the use of  
the system  
There is a limit to the degree of  
recognition accuracy and control  
performance that this system can  
provide, do not overly rely on this  
system. The driver is always  
responsible for paying attention to  
the vehicle’s surroundings and  
driving safely.  
A
Front corner sensor detection  
To ensure the system can  
operate properly  
B
Front center sensor detection  
Make sure to observe the follow-  
ing precautions. The system may  
not operate properly and may  
lead to an unexpected accident.  
When these precautions cannot  
be observed, turn the system off.  
C
Rear corner sensor detection  
D
Rear center sensor detection  
Front side sensor detection*  
Rear side sensor detection*  
E
F
Do not damage the sensors,  
and always keep them clean.  
*
: Vehicles with Advanced Park  
Do not attach a sticker or install  
an electronic component, such  
as a backlit license plate (espe-  
cially fluorescent type), fog  
lights, fender pole or wireless  
antenna near a radar sensor.  
Turning the intuitive park-  
ing assist on/off  
The intuitive parking assist can  
be enabled/disabled on  
the multi-information display.  
(P.166)  
of  
Do not subject the surrounding  
area of the sensor to a strong  
impact. If subjected to an  
impact, have the vehicle  
inspected by your Toyota  
dealer. If the front or rear  
bumper needs to be  
When the intuitive parking assist  
function is disabled, the intuitive  
parking assist OFF indicator  
(P.152) illuminates.  
removed/installed or replaced,  
contact your Toyota dealer.  
To re-enable the system, select  
Do not modify, disassemble or  
paint the sensors.  
on the multi-information dis-  
play, select the intuitive parking  
assist and turn it on. If the sys-  
tem is disabled, it will remain off  
Do not attach a license plate  
cover.  
365  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
If an abnormality is displayed even  
though there are no water droplets,  
ice, snow or dirt, the sensor may be  
operating abnormally. Have the  
vehicle inspected by your Toyota  
dealer.  
WARNING  
Keep your tires properly  
inflated.  
A non-genuine Toyota suspen-  
sion (lowered suspension, etc.)  
is installed.  
If “System Stopped See  
Owner’s Manual” is displayed  
on the multi-information display  
Notes when washing the vehi-  
cle  
Water may be continuously flowing  
over the sensor surface, such as in  
a heavy rain. When the system  
determines that it is normal, the sys-  
tem will return to normal.  
Do not apply intensive bursts of  
water or steam to the sensor  
area. Doing so may result in the  
sensor malfunctioning.  
If “System Malfunction Visit  
Your Dealer” is displayed on  
the multi-information display  
When using a high pressure  
washer to wash the vehicle, do  
not spray the sensors directly,  
as doing so may cause a sensor  
to malfunction.  
There may be a sensor or voltage  
malfunction. Have the vehicle  
inspected by your Toyota dealer.  
When using steam to clean the  
vehicle, do not direct steam too  
close to the sensors as doing so  
may cause a sensor to malfunc-  
tion.  
Sensor detection information  
The sensor’s detection areas are  
limited to the areas around the  
vehicle’s front and rear bumpers.  
5
Certain vehicle conditions and the  
surrounding environment may  
affect the ability of a sensor to cor-  
rectly detect an object.  
The system can be operated  
when  
The power switch is in ON.  
Objects may not be detected if  
they are too close to the sensor.  
The intuitive parking assist func-  
tion is on.  
There will be a short delay  
between object detection and dis-  
play. Even at low speeds, there is  
a possibility that the object will  
come within the sensor’s detection  
areas before the display is shown  
and the warning beep sounds.  
The vehicle speed is less than  
about 6 mph (10 km/h).  
The shift position is in a position  
other than P.  
If “Parking Assist Unavailable  
Sensor Blocked” is displayed  
on the multi-information display  
It might be difficult to hear the  
buzzer due to the volume of the  
audio system or air flow noise of  
the air conditioning system.  
A sensor may be covered with ice,  
snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice,  
snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to  
return the system to normal.  
It may be difficult to hear the  
buzzer if buzzers for other sys-  
tems are sounding.  
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor  
at low temperatures, a warning  
message may be displayed or the  
sensor may not be able to detect an  
object. Once the ice melts, the sys-  
tem will return to normal.  
If the meter malfunctions, the  
buzzer may not sound.  
366  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Objects which the system may  
not properly detect  
When vehicle horns, vehicle  
detectors, motorcycle engines, air  
brakes of large vehicles, the clear-  
ance sonar of other vehicles or  
other devices which produce ultra-  
sonic waves are near the vehicle.  
The shape of the object may pre-  
vent the sensor from detecting it.  
Pay particular attention to the fol-  
lowing objects:  
A sensor is coated with a sheet of  
spray or heavy rain.  
Wires, fences, ropes, etc.  
Cotton, snow and other materials  
that absorb sound waves  
If objects draw too close to the  
sensor.  
Sharply-angled objects  
Low objects  
When a pedestrian is wearing  
clothing that does not reflect ultra-  
sonic waves (ex. skirts with gath-  
ers or frills).  
Tall objects with upper sections  
projecting outwards in the direc-  
tion of your vehicle  
When objects that are not perpen-  
dicular to the ground, not perpen-  
dicular to the vehicle traveling  
direction, uneven, or waving are in  
the detection range.  
People may not be detected if they  
are wearing certain types of cloth-  
ing.  
Situations in which the system  
may not operate properly  
When strong winds are blowing.  
When driving in inclement weather  
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm.  
Certain vehicle conditions and the  
surrounding environment may affect  
the ability of a sensor to correctly  
detect objects. Particular instances  
where this may occur are listed  
below.  
When an object that cannot be  
detected is between the vehicle  
and a detected object.  
If an object such as a vehicle,  
motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian  
cuts in front of the vehicle or runs  
out from the side of the vehicle.  
There is dirt, snow, water drops or  
ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the  
sensors will resolve this problem.)  
A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the  
area will resolve this problem.)  
In especially cold weather, if a  
sensor is frozen the sensor dis-  
play may be displayed abnor-  
mally, or objects, such as a wall,  
may not be detected.  
If the orientation of a sensor has  
been changed due to a collision or  
other impact.  
When equipment such as a towing  
eyelet, transport hook, bumper  
protector, bumper trim, bicycle  
carrier or snow-removal device  
(snow plow) is installed near the  
sensor.  
When a sensor or the area around  
a sensor is extremely hot or cold.  
If the front of the vehicle is raised  
or lowered due to the carried load.  
If the vehicle cannot be driven in a  
stable manner, such as when the  
vehicle has been in an accident or  
is malfunctioning.  
When tire chains, a compact  
spare tire or an emergency tire  
puncture repair kit are used.  
On an extremely bumpy road, on  
an incline, on gravel, or on grass.  
367  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Situations in which the system When vehicle horns, vehicle  
may operate even if there is no  
possibility of a collision  
detectors, motorcycle engines, air  
brakes of large vehicles, the clear-  
ance sonar of other vehicles or  
other devices which produce ultra-  
sonic waves are near the vehicle.  
In some situations, such as the fol-  
lowing, the system may operate  
even though there is no possibility of  
a collision.  
If the front of the vehicle is raised  
or lowered due to the carried load.  
When driving on a narrow road.  
If the orientation of a sensor has  
been changed due to a collision or  
other impact.  
The vehicle is approaching a tall  
or curved curb.  
Driving close to columns (H-  
shaped steel beams, etc.) in multi-  
story parking garages, construc-  
tion sites, etc.  
When driving toward a banner,  
flag, low-hanging branch or boom  
barrier (such as those used at rail-  
road crossings, toll gates and  
parking lots).  
If the vehicle cannot be driven in a  
stable manner, such as when the  
vehicle has been in an accident or  
is malfunctioning.  
On an extremely bumpy road, on  
an incline, on gravel, or on grass.  
When there is a rut or hole in the  
surface of the road.  
5
When driving on a metal cover  
(grating), such as those used for  
drainage ditches.  
When driving up or down a steep  
slope.  
If a sensor is hit by a large amount  
of water, such as when driving on  
a flooded road.  
When tire chains, a compact  
spare tire or an emergency tire  
puncture repair kit are used.  
There is dirt, snow, water drops or  
ice on a sensor. (Cleaning the  
sensors will resolve this problem.)  
A sensor is coated with a sheet of  
spray or heavy rain.  
When driving in inclement weather  
such as fog, snow or a sandstorm.  
When strong winds are blowing.  
368  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
sensors cannot detect objects that  
are extremely close to the vehicle.  
Sensor detection display,  
object distance  
The range of the sensors may  
change depending on the shape of  
the object, etc.  
Detection range of the sen-  
sors  
Vehicles with Advanced Park  
Vehicles without Advanced  
Park  
A
Approximately 6.6 ft. (200  
cm)  
A
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100  
cm)  
The diagram shows the detection  
range of the sensors. Note that the  
sensors cannot detect objects that  
are extremely close to the vehicle.  
B
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150  
cm)  
The range of the sensors may  
change depending on the shape of  
the object etc.  
C
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)  
The diagram shows the detection  
range of the sensors. Note that the  
The distance and buzzer  
Vehicles without Advanced Park  
Approximate distance to obstacle  
Front center sensor:  
Buzzer  
Slow  
*
*
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)  
Rear center sensor:  
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)  
*
Medium  
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)  
369  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Approximate distance to obstacle Buzzer  
*
Fast  
Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)  
Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)  
Less than approximately 0.5 ft. (15 cm)  
Continuous  
*
: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.370)  
Vehicles with Advanced Park  
Approximate distance to obstacle  
Buzzer  
Front center sensor:  
Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) to 3.3 ft. (100 cm)  
Rear center sensor:  
Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) to 4.9 ft. (150 cm)  
Corner sensor:  
Does not sound  
(Display only)  
Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)  
Side sensor:  
5
Approximately 6.6 ft. (200 cm) to 5.4 ft. (165 cm)  
Front center sensor:  
*
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)  
Rear center sensor:  
Slow  
*
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)  
Side sensor:  
*
Approximately 5.4 ft. (165 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)  
Except side sensor:  
*
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)  
Medium  
Side sensor:  
*
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.3 ft. (40 cm)  
Except side sensor:  
*
Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)  
Fast  
Side sensor:  
*
Approximately 1.3 ft. (40 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)  
370  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Approximate distance to obstacle  
Buzzer  
Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)  
Less than approximately 0.5 ft. (15 cm)  
Continuous  
*
: Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (P.370)  
Buzzer operation and dis-  
Muting a buzzer temporarily  
tance to an object  
When an object is detected, the  
temporary mute switch is dis-  
played on the Multimedia Display.  
Select the switch to mute a buzzer  
of the intuitive parking assist,  
RCTA (if equipped), and RCD (if  
equipped) all together.  
A buzzer sounds when the sen-  
sors are operating.  
The buzzer beeps faster as  
the vehicle approaches a  
static object. When the vehi-  
cle comes within the approxi-  
mately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the  
static object, the buzzer will  
sound continuously.  
Mute will be automatically can-  
celed in the following situations.  
• When the shift position is  
changed.  
• When the vehicle speed exceeds  
a certain speed.  
• When there is a malfunction in a  
sensor or the system is temporar-  
ily unavailable.  
• When the operating function is  
disabled manually.  
When 2 or more sensors  
simultaneously detect a static  
object, the buzzer sounds for  
the nearest object.  
• When the power switch is turned  
off.  
After a buzzer begins sound-  
ing, if the distance between  
the vehicle and the detected a  
static object does not become  
shorter, the buzzer will be  
Intuitive parking assist  
object warning function  
(vehicles with Advanced  
Park)  
muted automatically. (auto-  
matic buzzer mute function)  
The object warning function  
informs the driver of the exis-  
tence of objects along the side  
of the vehicle, using a display  
and buzzer, if the objects are  
within the estimated path of the  
vehicle.  
Adjusting the buzzer vol-  
ume  
The buzzer volume of the intui-  
tive parking assist, RCTA (if  
equipped), and RCD (if  
equipped) can be adjusted all  
together on  
of the multi-infor-  
mation display. (P.618)  
371  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
A
Object  
B
Calculated vehicle route  
When the vehicle is moving, the side sensors or side cameras can  
detect objects. While the vehicle is moving, if a detected object can  
no longer be detected by the side sensors or side cameras, the loca-  
tion of the object relative to the vehicle is estimated. If the object is  
determined to be in the estimated path of the vehicle, the object  
warning function will operate.  
5
A
Object detected by side sensors or side cameras  
1 The vehicle is stopped and objects along the sides of the vehicle  
are not detected.  
2 Objects are detected as the vehicle is moving.  
3 Even though the objects are outside of the detection area of the  
side sensors or side cameras, a warning is displayed and a  
buzzer sounds.  
has moved approximately 23.0 ft.  
(7 m) or less  
The intuitive parking assist  
object warning function is oper-  
ational when  
switch has been pressed and  
the Multimedia Display is dis-  
played.  
The vehicle moves about 23.0 ft.  
(7 m) after the hybrid system is  
started.  
The front or rear sensor detects a  
stationary object.  
The R shift position is selected.  
After the shift position has been  
changed from R to D, the vehicle  
372  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Detection of objects along the  
When starting off shortly after  
the power switch is turned to  
ON and a small vehicle or other  
object which cannot be detected  
by a front side sensor is next to  
the vehicle.  
In the situation shown in the fol-  
lowing illustration, even if the  
vehicle starts off, the vehicle on  
the left will not be detected and  
the object warning function will  
not operate.  
sides of the vehicle  
Objects along the sides of the  
vehicle are not instantaneously  
detected. The location of objects  
in relation to the vehicle is esti-  
mated after they are first detected  
by the front or rear side sensors,  
or side cameras. Therefore, after  
the power switch is changed to  
ON, even if an object is along the  
side of the vehicle, it may not be  
detected until the vehicle has  
been driven a small amount and  
the side sensors or side cameras  
completely scan the areas along  
the sides of the vehicle.  
If a vehicle, person, animal, etc., is  
detected by a side sensors or side  
cameras, but then leaves the  
detection area of the side sensors  
or side cameras, the system will  
assume the object has not moved.  
When an object or person is in a  
position which cannot be  
detected by the side sensors or  
side cameras.  
WARNING  
Side sensors and side cam-  
When, after the side sensors  
have completed scanning the  
areas along the sides of the  
vehicle, a vehicle, person, or  
other object approaches the  
side of the vehicle and cannot  
be detected.  
eras  
In situations such as the following,  
the function may not operate cor-  
rectly, possibly leading to an acci-  
dent. Proceed carefully.  
When the outside rear view mir-  
ror is closed, the side sensors  
or side cameras cannot detect  
objects.  
If the 12-volt battery was dis-  
charged or has been removed  
and installed, fold and extend  
the outside rear view mirrors.  
373  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
RCTA (Rear Cross  
Traffic Alert) function  
System components  
*
*
: If equipped  
The RCTA function uses the  
BSM rear side radar sensors  
installed behind the rear  
bumper. This function is  
intended to assist the driver  
in checking areas that are  
not easily visible when  
backing up.  
A
Meter control switches  
Operate the meter control switches  
to enable/disable the RCTA func-  
tion on the multi-information dis-  
play.  
WARNING  
Cautions regarding the use of  
the system  
B
Outside rear view mirror indi-  
cators  
The driver is solely responsible for  
safe driving. Always drive safely,  
taking care to observe your sur-  
roundings.  
5
If a vehicle is detected as  
approaching from the left or right  
behind the vehicle, both outside  
rear view mirror indicators  
(P.152) will blink and a buzzer  
will sound.  
The RCTA function is only a sup-  
plementary function which alerts  
the driver that a vehicle is  
approaching from the right or left  
at the rear of the vehicle.  
As the RCTA function may not  
function correctly under certain  
conditions, the driver’s own visual  
confirmation of safety is neces-  
sary.  
C
Multimedia Display  
If a vehicle approaching from the  
right or left at the rear of the vehicle  
is detected, the RCTA icon  
(P.374) for the detected side will  
be displayed on the Multimedia Dis-  
Over reliance on this function may  
lead to an accident resulting  
death or serious injury.  
*
play. This illustration shows an  
example of a vehicle approaching  
from both sides of the vehicle.  
To ensure the system can  
operate properly  
*
P.355  
: Depending on the vehicle grade  
and equipped options, the actual  
screen may be different from this  
illustration.  
D
Driving assist information  
indicator  
Illuminates when the RCTA is  
turned off. At this time, a message  
374  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
will be displayed on the multi-infor-  
mation display.  
mirror indicators and sounding a  
buzzer.  
Turning the RCTA func-  
tion on/off  
The RCTA can be enabled/dis-  
abled through a customize set-  
ting. (P.618)  
When the RCTA function is off,  
the driving assist information  
indicator (P.152) will illumi-  
nate and a message will be dis-  
played on the multi-information  
display. Each time the power  
switch is turned to ON, the  
RCTA function is enabled.  
A
Approaching vehicles  
B
Detection areas of approach-  
ing vehicles  
RCTA icon display  
When a vehicle approaching  
from the right or left at the rear  
of the vehicle is detected, the  
following will be displayed on  
the Multimedia Display.  
Outside rear view mirror indica-  
tor visibility  
In strong sunlight, the outside rear  
view mirror indicator may be difficult  
to see.  
• Example (Panoramic view  
monitor): Vehicles are  
Hearing the RCTA buzzer  
approaching from both sides  
of the vehicle  
The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to  
hear over loud noises, such as if the  
audio system volume is high.  
Rear side radar sensors  
P.355  
RCTA function  
Operation of the RCTA  
function  
The RCTA function uses rear  
side radar sensors to detect  
vehicles approaching from the  
right or left at the rear of the  
vehicle and alerts the driver of  
the presence of such vehicles  
by flashing the outside rear view  
RCTA function detection  
areas  
The areas that vehicles can be  
detected in are outlined below.  
375  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
temporary mute switch is displayed  
on the Multimedia Display.  
Select the switch to mute the buzzer  
of the intuitive parking assist, RCTA,  
and RCD (if equipped) all together.  
Mute will be canceled automatically  
in the following situations:  
When the shift position is  
changed.  
When the vehicle speed exceeds  
a certain speed.  
The buzzer can alert the driver  
of faster vehicles approaching  
from farther away.  
When there is a malfunction in a  
sensor or the system is temporar-  
ily unavailable.  
Example:  
When the operating function is  
disabled manually.  
Approaching  
A
Approximate  
alert distance  
When the power switch is turned  
off.  
vehicle speed  
Conditions under which the  
system will not detect a vehicle  
34 mph (56  
km/h) (fast)  
98 ft. (30 m)  
The RCTA function is not designed  
to detect the following types of vehi-  
cles and/or objects:  
5
5 mph (8 km/h)  
(slow)  
13 ft. (4 m)  
Vehicles approaching from  
directly behind  
The RCTA function is opera-  
tional when  
Vehicles backing up in a parking  
space next to your vehicle  
The RCTA function operates when  
all of the following conditions are  
met:  
Vehicles that the sensors cannot  
detect due to obstructions  
The power switch is in ON.  
The RCTA function is on.  
The shift position is in R.  
The vehicle speed is less than  
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).  
The approaching vehicle speed is  
between approximately 5 mph (8  
km/h) and 34 mph (56 km/h).  
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked  
vehicles and similar stationary  
Setting the buzzer volume  
*
objects  
The buzzer volume of the RCTA,  
intuitive parking assist, and RCD (if  
equipped) can be adjusted all  
together through a customize set-  
ting. (P.618)  
Small motorcycles, bicycles,  
*
pedestrians, etc.  
Vehicles moving away from your  
vehicle  
Muting a buzzer temporarily  
Vehicles approaching from the  
parking spaces next to your vehi-  
When an object is detected, the  
376  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
*
cle  
The distance between the sensor  
and approaching vehicle gets too  
close  
*
: Depending on the conditions,  
detection of a vehicle and/or  
object may occur.  
Situations in which the system  
may not operate properly  
The RCTA function may not detect  
vehicles correctly in the following  
situations:  
When the sensor is misaligned  
due to a strong impact to the sen-  
sor or its surrounding area  
When backing out of a sharp  
angle parking spot  
When mud, snow, ice, a sticker,  
etc., is covering the sensor or sur-  
rounding area on the position  
above the rear bumper  
When driving on a road surface  
that is wet with standing water  
during bad weather, such as  
heavy rain, snow, or fog  
When multiple vehicles are  
approaching with only a small gap  
between each vehicle  
Immediately after the RCTA func-  
tion is turned on  
When a vehicle is approaching at  
high speed  
Immediately after the hybrid sys-  
tem is started with the RCTA func-  
tion on  
When equipment that may  
obstruct a sensor is installed, such  
as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-  
tector (an additional trim strip,  
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow  
When the sensors cannot detect a  
vehicle due to obstructions  
When towing with the vehicle  
When there is a significant differ-  
ence in height between your vehi-  
cle and the vehicle that enters the  
detection area  
When backing up on a slope with  
a sharp change in grade  
When a sensor or the area around  
a sensor is extremely hot or cold  
If the suspension has been modi-  
fied or tires of a size other than  
specified are installed  
If the front of the vehicle is raised  
or lowered due to the carried load  
When turning while backing up  
377  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When a vehicle turns into the  
detection area  
When equipment that may  
obstruct a sensor is installed, such  
as a towing eyelet, bumper pro-  
tector (an additional trim strip,  
etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow  
When a vehicle passes by the  
side of your vehicle  
Situations in which the system  
may operate even if there is no  
possibility of a collision  
Instances of the RCTA function  
unnecessary detecting a vehicle  
and/or object may increase in the  
following situations:  
5
When a detected vehicle turns  
while approaching the vehicle  
When the parking space faces a  
street and vehicles are being  
driven on the street  
When there are spinning objects  
near your vehicle such as the fan  
of an air conditioning unit  
When the distance between your  
vehicle and metal objects, such as  
a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked  
vehicle, which may reflect electri-  
cal waves toward the rear of the  
vehicle, is short  
When water is splashed or  
sprayed toward the rear bumper,  
such as from a sprinkler  
Moving objects (flags, exhaust  
fumes, large rain droplets or  
snowflakes, rain water on the road  
surface, etc.)  
When the distance between your  
vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc.,  
that enters the detection area is  
short  
Gratings and gutters  
378  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When a sensor or the area around  
RCD (Rear Camera  
Detection) function  
a sensor is extremely hot or cold  
*
If the suspension has been modi-  
fied or tires of a size other than  
specified are installed  
*
: If equipped  
If the front of the vehicle is raised  
When the vehicle is back-  
ing up, the rear camera  
detection function can  
detect pedestrians in the  
detection area behind the  
vehicle. If a pedestrian is  
detected, a buzzer will  
sound and an icon will be  
displayed on the Multimedia  
Display to inform the driver  
of the pedestrian.  
or lowered due to the carried load  
When towing with the vehicle  
WARNING  
Cautions regarding the use of  
the system  
The recognition and control capa-  
bilities for this system are limited.  
The driver should always drive  
safely by always being responsi-  
ble without over relying on the  
system and have a understanding  
of the surrounding situations.  
To ensure the system can  
operate properly  
Observe the following, otherwise  
there is the danger that could lead  
to an accident.  
Always clean the camera with-  
out damaging it.  
Do not install market electronic  
parts (such as Illuminated  
license plate, fog lamps, etc.) in  
the camera vicinity.  
379  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
RCD display  
WARNING  
Do not subject the camera vicin-  
ity to strong impacts. If the vicin-  
ity is subjected to a strong  
impact, have the vehicle  
inspected by your Toyota  
dealer.  
Do not disassemble, remodel or  
paint the camera.  
Do not attach accessories or  
stickers to the camera.  
A
Pedestrian detection icon  
Do not install market protection  
parts (bumper trim, etc.) to the  
rear bumper.  
Displayed automatically when a  
pedestrian is detected behind the  
vehicle.  
Maintain suitable tire air pres-  
sure.  
Make sure the back door is  
Turning the RCD function  
on/off  
completely closed.  
RCD function is turned off  
5
The RCD function can be  
In the following situations the sys-  
tem turns off. The RCD function  
may not operate properly and  
thus there is the danger that an  
accident may occur.  
enabled/disabled on  
multi-information display.  
(P.618)  
of the  
When the RCD function is disabled,  
the driving assist information indi-  
cator (P.152) illuminates, and a  
message is displayed on the multi-  
information display.  
The contents mentioned above  
are not observed.  
Suspensions other than genu-  
ine parts are installed.  
Each time the power switch is  
turned off then changed to ON, the  
RCD function will be enabled auto-  
matically.  
System components  
Location of the rear camera  
When a pedestrian is  
detected  
If a pedestrian is in the area  
behind the vehicle or if the rear  
camera detected that a pedes-  
trian is approaching the vehicle  
from behind, the system urges  
380  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
caution from the driver by  
sounding the buzzer and dis-  
playing the detection of a pedes-  
trian on the Multimedia Display  
as follows:  
Pedestrian detection icon:  
Blinks  
The rear camera detection func-  
tion is operational when  
The power switch is in ON.  
RCD function is on.  
The shift position is in R.  
Advanced Park is not operating  
(vehicles with Advanced Park)  
Setting the buzzer volume  
The buzzer volume of the intuitive  
parking assist, RCTA, and RCD can  
be adjusted all together on  
the multi-information display.  
(P.618)  
of  
Muting a buzzer temporarily  
When an object is detected, the  
temporary mute switch is displayed  
on the Multimedia Display.  
A
If a pedestrian is detected in  
A
area  
Select the switch to mute a buzzer  
of the intuitive parking assist, RCTA,  
and RCD all together.  
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly  
Pedestrian detection icon:  
Blinks  
Mute will be automatically canceled  
in the following situations:  
B
If a pedestrian is detected in  
When the shift position is  
changed.  
B
area  
When the vehicle speed exceeds  
a certain speed.  
Buzzer (When the vehicle is  
stationary): Sounds 3 times  
Buzzer (When the vehicle is  
backing up, when a pedes-  
trian approaches the rear of  
the vehicle): Sounds repeat-  
edly  
When there is a malfunction in a  
sensor or the system is temporar-  
ily unavailable.  
When the operating function is  
disabled manually.  
When the power switch is turned  
off.  
Pedestrian detection icon:  
Blinks  
Situations in which the system  
may not operate properly  
C
If the system determines that  
your vehicle may collide with  
Some pedestrians, such as the  
following, may not be detected by  
the rear camera detection func-  
tion, preventing the function from  
operating properly:  
C
a pedestrian in area  
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly  
• Pedestrians who are bending for-  
381  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
ward or squatting  
installed  
• Pedestrians who are lying down  
• Pedestrians who are running  
• Pedestrians who suddenly appear  
from the shadow of the vehicle or  
a building  
• Pedestrians who are riding mov-  
ing objects such as a bicycle or  
skateboard  
• Pedestrians wearing oversized  
clothing such as a rain coat, long  
skirt, etc., making their silhouette  
obscure  
• Pedestrians whose body is par-  
tially hidden by an object, such as  
a cart or umbrella  
• When an aftermarket electronic  
part (backlit license plate, fog  
light, etc.) is installed near the rear  
camera  
• If a bumper protector, such as an  
additional trim strip, is installed to  
the rear bumper  
Situations in which the system  
may operate unexpectedly  
Even though there are no pedes-  
trians in the detection area, some  
objects, such as the following,  
may be detected, possibly caus-  
ing the rear camera detection  
function to operate.  
• Three dimensional objects, such  
as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or  
parked vehicle  
• Pedestrians which are obscured  
by darkness, such as at night  
In some situations, such as the  
following, pedestrians may not be  
detected by the rear camera  
detection function, preventing the  
function from operating properly:  
• When backing up in inclement  
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)  
• When the rear camera is  
obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are  
attached) or scratched  
• When a very bright light, such as  
the sun, or the headlights of  
another vehicle, shines directly  
into the rear camera  
• When backing up in a place where  
the surrounding brightness  
changes suddenly, such as at the  
entrance or exit of a garage or  
underground parking lot  
• When backing up in a dim envi-  
ronment such as during dusk or in  
an underground parking lot  
• When the camera position and  
direction are deviated  
• When a towing hook is attached  
• When towing with the vehicle  
• When water droplets are flowing  
on the camera lens  
• When the vehicle height is  
extremely changed (nose up,  
nose down, etc.)  
• When tire chains or an emergency  
tire puncture repair kit are used  
• When the suspension has been  
lowered or tires that have a differ-  
ent size than the genuine tires are  
• Moving objects, such as a car or  
motorcycle  
• Objects moving toward your vehi-  
cle when backing up, such as  
flags or puddles (or airborne mat-  
ter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or  
snow)  
• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram  
rails, road repairs, white lines,  
pedestrian crossings or fallen  
leaves on the road  
• Metal covers (gratings), such as  
those used for drainage ditches  
• Objects reflected in a puddle or on  
a wet road surface  
5
• Shadows on the road  
In some situations, such as the  
following, the rear camera detec-  
tion function may operate even  
though there are no pedestrians in  
the detection area.  
• When backing up toward the road-  
side or a bump on the road  
• When backing up toward an  
incline/decline  
• When the vehicle height is  
extremely changed (nose up,  
nose down, etc.)  
• If a bumper protector, such as an  
additional trim strip, is installed to  
the rear bumper  
• When an aftermarket electronic  
part (backlit license plate, fog  
light, etc.) is installed near the rear  
382  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
camera  
PK SB (Park ing Sup-  
*
• If the orientation of the rear cam-  
era has been changed due to a  
collision or other impact, or  
removal and installation  
• If a towing eyelet is installed to the  
rear of the vehicle  
• When towing with the vehicle  
• When water is flowing over the  
rear camera lens  
• When the rear camera is  
obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are  
attached) or scratched  
• If there is a flashing light in the  
detection area, such as the emer-  
gency flashers of another vehicle  
• When tire chains or an emergency  
tire puncture repair kit are used.  
port Brake)  
*
: If equipped  
The PKSB (Parking Support  
Brake) is a system that  
issues warnings and auto-  
matically performs braking  
to help reduce collision  
damage with operation tar-  
gets that were detected  
when traveling at a low  
speed such as when park-  
ing.  
Situations in which the rear cam-  
era detection function may be diffi-  
cult to notice  
• The buzzer may be difficult to hear  
if the surrounding area is noisy or  
the audio system volume is high.  
• If the temperature in the cabin is  
extremely high or low, the Multi-  
media Display may not operate  
correctly.  
This system consists of the  
following functions: a Park-  
ing Support Brake function  
(static objects to the front  
and rear) that detects static  
objects such as walls, a  
Parking Support Brake  
function (rear-crossing  
vehicles)* that detects vehi-  
cles approaching from the  
rear while backing up, a  
Parking Support Brake  
function (rear pedestrians)*  
that detects pedestrians  
behind the vehicle, and a  
Parking Support Brake  
function (static objects  
around the vehicle) (vehi-  
cles with Advanced Park)  
that detects static objects  
around the vehicle.  
*
: If equipped  
383  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
PKSB (Parking Support  
WARNING  
Brake) system  
Cautions regarding the use of  
the system  
The system has detected the  
following as operation targets.  
(The operation targets vary  
depending on the function.)  
Do not overly rely on the system,  
as doing so may lead to an acci-  
dent.  
Always drive while checking the  
safety of the surroundings of the  
vehicle.  
Parking Support Brake func-  
tion (static objects to the front  
and rear):  
Depending on the vehicle and  
road conditions, weather, etc., the  
system may not operate.  
P.388  
The detection capabilities of sen-  
sors and radars are limited.  
Always drive while checking the  
safety of the surroundings of the  
vehicle.  
Parking Support Brake func-  
tion (rear-crossing vehicles)  
(if equipped):  
The driver is solely responsible  
for safe driving. Always drive  
carefully, taking care to observe  
your surroundings. The Parking  
Support Brake system is  
designed to provide support to  
lessen the severity of collisions.  
However, it may not operate in  
some situations.  
P.392  
Parking Support Brake func-  
tion (rear pedestrians) (if  
equipped):  
5
P.393  
Parking Support Brake func-  
tion (static objects around the  
vehicle) (vehicles with  
The Parking Support Brake sys-  
tem is not designed to stop the  
vehicle completely. Addition-  
ally, even if the system has  
stopped the vehicle, it is neces-  
sary to depress the brake pedal  
immediately as brake control  
will be canceled after approxi-  
mately 2 seconds.  
Advanced Park):  
P.388  
It is extremely dangerous to  
check the system operations by  
intentionally driving the vehicle  
into the direction of a wall, etc.  
Never attempt such actions.  
When to disable the Parking  
Support Brake  
In the following situations, disable  
the Parking Support Brake as the  
system may operate even though  
there is no possibility of a colli-  
sion.  
384  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Precautions for the suspen-  
WARNING  
sion  
When inspecting the vehicle  
using a chassis roller, chassis  
dynamo or free roller  
Do not modify the suspension of  
the vehicle. If the height or tilt of  
the vehicle is changed, the sen-  
sors may not be able to detect  
detectable objects and the system  
may not operate correctly, possi-  
bly leading to an accident.  
When loading the vehicle onto a  
boat, truck or other transport  
vessel  
If the suspension has been  
modified or tires of a size other  
than specified are installed  
NOTICE  
If the front of the vehicle is  
raised or lowered due to the  
carried load  
If “System Stopped See  
Owner’s Manual” is displayed  
on the multi-information dis-  
play and the driving assist  
information indicator is illu-  
minated  
When equipment that may  
obstruct a sensor is installed,  
such as a towing eyelet, trans-  
port hook, bumper protector (an  
additional trim strip, etc.), bicy-  
cle carrier, or snow plow  
If this message is displayed  
immediately after the power  
switch is changed to ON, operate  
the vehicle carefully, paying atten-  
tion to your surroundings. It may  
be necessary to drive the vehicle  
for a certain amount of time  
before the system returns to nor-  
mal. (If the system is not return to  
normal after driving for a while,  
clean the sensor or rear camera  
lens.)  
When using automatic car  
washing devices  
If the vehicle cannot be driven in  
a stable manner, such as when  
the vehicle has been in an acci-  
dent or is malfunctioning  
When the vehicle is driven in a  
sporty manner or off-road  
Enabling/Disabling the  
Parking Support Brake  
When the tires are not properly  
inflated  
When the tires are very worn  
All of the Parking Support Brake  
functions (static objects to the  
front and rear, rear-crossing  
vehicles [if equipped], rear  
pedestrians [if equipped], and  
static objects around the vehicle  
[vehicles with Advanced Park])  
are enabled/disabled simultane-  
ously.  
When tire chains, a compact  
spare tire or an emergency tire  
puncture repair kit are used.  
When towing with the vehicle  
The Parking Support Brake  
function can be enabled/dis-  
abled on  
of the multi-infor-  
385  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
amount is restricted by the system.  
mation display. (P.167)  
Multimedia Display (vehicles with  
panoramic view monitor): No warn-  
ing displayed  
When the PKSB (Parking Support  
Brake) is disabled, the driving  
assist information indicator  
(P.152) illuminates, and a mes-  
sage is displayed on the multi-infor-  
mation display.  
Multi-information display: “Object  
Detected Acceleration Reduced”  
Driving assist information indicator:  
Not illuminated  
If the system switches to OFF (dis-  
abled) and the PKSB (Parking Sup-  
port Brake) is stopped, the PKSB  
(Parking Support Brake) will not be  
re-enabled until ON (enabled) is  
selected again on the multi-infor-  
mation display and the system  
operates.  
Buzzer: Does not sound  
Hybrid system output restric-  
tion control is operating (out-  
put restricted as much as  
possible)  
The system has determined that  
stronger-than-normal brake opera-  
tion is necessary.  
If the system is disabled, it will  
remain off even if the power switch  
is turned to ON after the power  
switch has been turned to OFF.  
Multimedia Display (vehicles with  
panoramic view monitor): “BRAKE!”  
5
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”  
Display and buzzer for  
hybrid system output  
restriction control and  
brake control  
Driving assist information indicator:  
Not illuminated  
Buzzer: Short beep  
Brake control is operating  
If the hybrid system output  
restriction control or brake con-  
trol operates, a buzzer will  
sound and a message will be  
displayed on the Multimedia  
Display and multi-information  
display, to alert the driver.  
The system determined that emer-  
gency braking is necessary.  
Multimedia Display (vehicles with  
panoramic view monitor): “BRAKE!”  
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”  
Driving assist information indicator:  
Not illuminated  
Depending on the situation, hybrid  
system output restriction control will  
operate to either limit acceleration  
or restrict output as much as possi-  
ble.  
Buzzer: Short beep  
Vehicle stopped by system  
operation  
The vehicle has been stopped by  
brake control operation.  
Hybrid system output restric-  
tion control is operating  
(acceleration restriction)  
Multimedia Display (vehicles with  
panoramic view monitor): “Press  
Brake Pedal”  
Acceleration greater than a certain  
386  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Multi-information display: “Acceler-  
ator Pedal is Pressed Press Brake  
Pedal” (If the accelerator pedal is  
not depressed, “Press Brake Pedal”  
will be displayed.)  
C
Time  
Figure 2: When hybrid system  
output restriction control oper-  
ates  
Driving assist information indicator:  
Illuminated  
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly  
System overview  
If the Parking Support Brake  
determines that a collision with a  
detected object or pedestrian (if  
equipped) is possible, the hybrid  
system output will be restricted  
to restrain any increase in the  
vehicle speed. (Hybrid system  
output restriction control: See  
figure 2.)  
A
Hybrid system output  
B
Braking force  
C
Time  
D
Hybrid system output restric-  
tion control begins operating  
(System determines that pos-  
sibility of collision with  
Additionally, if the accelerator  
pedal continues to be  
depressed, the brakes will be  
applied automatically to reduce  
the vehicle speed. (Brake con-  
trol: See figure 3.)  
detected object is high)  
Figure 3: When hybrid system  
output restriction control and  
brake control operates  
Figure 1: When the PKSB  
(Parking Support Brake) is not  
operating  
A
Hybrid system output  
B
Braking force  
C
A
Time  
Hybrid system output  
D
B
Hybrid system output restric-  
Braking force  
387  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Buzzer  
tion control begins operating  
(System determines that pos-  
sibility of collision with  
Regardless of whether the intuitive  
parking assist is enabled or not  
(P.364), if the PKSB (Parking  
Support Brake) system is enabled  
(P.384), the buzzer will sound to  
notify the driver of the approximate  
distance to the object when the  
brake control and the hybrid system  
output restriction control are oper-  
ated.  
detected object is high)  
E
Brake control begins operat-  
ing (System determines that  
possibility of collision with  
detected object is extremely  
high)  
If the Parking Support Brake  
has operated  
If the vehicle is stopped due to oper-  
ation of the Parking Support Brake,  
the Parking Support Brake will be  
disabled and the driving assist infor-  
mation indicator will illuminate. In  
addition, even when the PKSB  
(Parking Support Brake) operates,  
the brake control is canceled after  
approximately 2 seconds to start off.  
Furthermore, the brake control also  
can be canceled by depressing the  
brake pedal. Depressing the accel-  
erator pedal again after that allows  
the vehicle to start off.  
5
Re-enabling the Parking Sup-  
port Brake  
To re-enable the Parking Support  
Brake when it is disabled due to  
operation of the PKSB (Parking  
Support Brake), either enable the  
system again, or turn the power  
switch off and then back to ON.  
Additionally, if any of the following  
conditions are met, the system will  
be re-enabled automatically and the  
driving assist information indicator  
will turn off (P.152):  
The P shift position is selected  
Drive with no operation targets in  
the traveling direction of the vehi-  
cle  
Change the traveling direction of  
the vehicle  
388  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When traveling at a low  
Parking Support Brake  
func tion (static  
speed and the brake pedal  
is not depressed, or is  
depressed late  
objects to the front  
and rear/static objects  
*
around the vehic le)  
*
: If equipped  
If the sensors detect a static  
object, such as a wall, in the  
traveling direction of the  
vehicle and the system  
determines that a collision  
may occur due to the vehi-  
cle suddenly moving for-  
ward due to an accidental  
accelerator pedal opera-  
tion, the vehicle moving the  
unintended direction due to  
the wrong shift position  
being selected, or while  
parking or traveling at low  
speeds, the system will  
operate to lessen the impact  
with the detected static  
object and reduce the  
When the accelerator pedal  
is depressed excessively  
resulting damage.  
Examples of function  
operation (static objects  
to the front and rear)  
This function will operate in situ-  
ations such as the following if an  
object is detected in the travel-  
ing direction of the vehicle.  
389  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When the vehicle moves  
forward due to the incorrect  
shift position being  
selected  
When moving forward and a  
collision with a stationary  
object on the inner side of a  
turn is likely  
When reversing and a colli-  
sion with a stationary  
object on the outer side of a  
turn is likely  
Examples of function  
5
operation (static objects  
around the vehicle) (vehi-  
cles with Advanced Park)  
The system will operate in the  
following situations when a sta-  
tionary object is detected in the  
surrounding area.  
Types of sensors  
P.363  
390  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
The Parking Support Brake  
WARNING  
function (static objects around  
*
To ensure the system can  
operate properly  
the vehicle) will operate when  
*
: Vehicles with Advanced Park  
P.364  
This function is operable when any  
of the following conditions are met in  
addition to the operating conditions  
for stationary objects in around the  
vehicle.  
If the PKSB (Parking Support  
Brake) operates unnecessar-  
ily, such as at a railroad  
crossing  
After the hybrid system has been  
started, the vehicle has moved  
approximately 23.0 ft. (7 m) or  
less  
P.387  
Notes when washing the vehi-  
cle  
P.365  
The R shift position is selected  
After the shift position has been  
changed from R to D, the vehicle  
has moved approximately 23.0 ft.  
(7 m) or less  
The Parking Support Brake  
function (static objects to the  
front and rear) will operate  
when  
The Parking Support Brake  
function (static objects to the  
front and rear/static objects  
The function will operate when the  
driving assist information indicator is  
not illuminated (P.150, 152) and  
all of the following conditions are  
met:  
*
around the vehicle ) will stop  
operating when  
*
: Vehicles with Advanced Park  
Hybrid system output restriction  
control  
The function will stop operating if  
any of the following conditions are  
met:  
• The Parking Support Brake is  
enabled.  
Hybrid system output restriction  
control  
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-  
abled.  
• The system determines that the  
collision has become avoidable  
with normal brake operation.  
• The static object is no longer  
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)  
away from the vehicle or in the  
traveling direction of the vehicle.  
• The vehicle speed is approxi-  
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.  
• There is a static object in the trav-  
eling direction of the vehicle and  
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)  
away.  
• The Parking Support Brake deter-  
mines that a stronger-than-nor-  
mal brake operation is necessary  
to avoid a collision.  
Brake control  
• Hybrid system output restriction  
control is operating  
• The Parking Support Brake deter-  
mines that an immediate brake  
operation is necessary to avoid a  
collision.  
Brake control  
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-  
abled.  
• Approximately 2 seconds have  
elapsed since the vehicle was  
stopped by brake control.  
• The brake pedal is depressed  
after the vehicle is stopped by  
brake control.  
• The static object is no longer  
approximately 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m)  
391  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
away from the vehicle or in the  
traveling direction of the vehicle.  
in relation to the vehicle is esti-  
mated after they are first detected  
by the front or rear side sensors,  
or side cameras. Therefore, after  
the power switch is changed to  
ON, even if an object is along the  
side of the vehicle, it may not be  
detected until the vehicle has  
been driven a small amount and  
the side sensors or side cameras  
completely scan the areas along  
the sides of the vehicle.  
Detection range of the Parking  
Support Brake function (static  
objects to the front and  
rear/static objects around the  
*
vehicle )  
*
: Vehicles with Advanced Park  
The detection range of the Parking  
Support Brake function (static  
objects to the front and rear/static  
objects around the vehicle) differs  
from the detection range of the intui-  
tive parking assist (P.363). There-  
fore, even if the intuitive parking  
assist detects an object and pro-  
vides a warning, the Parking Sup-  
port Brake function (static objects to  
the front and rear/static objects  
around the vehicle) may not start  
operating.  
If a vehicle, person, animal, etc., is  
detected by a side sensors or side  
cameras, but then leaves the  
detection area of the side sensors  
or side cameras, the system will  
assume the object has not moved.  
Situations in which the system  
may not operate properly  
5
P.366  
Situations in which the system  
may operate even if there is no  
possibility of a collision  
P.367  
Situations in which the system  
may operate even though there  
is no possibility of a collision  
(static objects around the vehi-  
cle) (vehicles with Advanced  
Park)  
In addition to the situations in which  
stationary objects front and rear  
(P.390) may not be detected,  
objects may not be detected by the  
sensors in the following situations:  
When moving sideways, such as  
when parallel parking (P.408)  
Detection of objects along the  
sides of the vehicle (static  
objects around the vehicle)  
(vehicles with Advanced Park)  
Objects along the sides of the  
vehicle are not instantaneously  
detected. The location of objects  
392  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Parking Support Brake  
function(rear-crossing  
Types of sensors  
P.355  
*
vehicles)  
WARNING  
*
: If equipped  
To ensure the system can  
operate properly  
If a rear radar sensor  
detects a vehicle approach-  
ing from the right or left at  
the rear of the vehicle and  
the system determines that  
the possibility of a collision  
is high, this function will  
perform brake control to  
reduce the likelihood of an  
impact with the approach-  
ing vehicle.  
P.355  
The Parking Support Brake  
function (rear-crossing vehi-  
cles) will operate when  
The function will operate when the  
driving assist information indicator is  
not illuminated (P.150, 152) and  
all of the following conditions are  
met:  
Hybrid system output restriction  
control  
• The Parking Support Brake is  
enabled.  
Examples of function  
operation  
• The vehicle speed is approxi-  
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.  
• Vehicles are approaching from the  
right or left at the rear of the vehi-  
cle at a traveling speed of approx-  
imately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.  
• The shift position is in R.  
• The Parking Support Brake deter-  
mines that a stronger than normal  
brake operation is necessary to  
avoid a collision with an approach-  
ing vehicle.  
This function will operate in situ-  
ations such as the following if a  
vehicle is detected in the travel-  
ing direction of the vehicle.  
When reversing, a vehicle is  
approaching and the brake  
pedal is not depressed, or  
is depressed late  
Brake control  
• Hybrid system output restriction  
control is operating  
• The Parking Support Brake deter-  
mines that an emergency brake  
operation is necessary to avoid a  
collision with an approaching vehi-  
cle.  
The Parking Support Brake  
function (rear-crossing vehi-  
cles) will stop operating when  
The function will stop operating if  
any of the following conditions are  
met:  
Hybrid system output restriction  
393  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
control  
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-  
abled.  
• The collision becomes avoidable  
with normal brake operation.  
• A vehicle is no longer approaching  
from the right or left at the rear of  
the vehicle.  
Parking Support Brake  
function (rear pedes-  
trians)  
*
*
: If equipped  
If the rear camera sensor  
detects a pedestrian behind  
the vehicle while backing up  
and the system determines  
that the possibility of collid-  
ing with the detected pedes-  
trian is high, a buzzer will  
sound. If the system deter-  
mines that the possibility of  
colliding with the detected  
pedestrian is extremely  
high, the brakes will be  
applied automatically to  
help reduce the impact of  
the collision.  
Brake control  
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-  
abled.  
• Approximately 2 seconds have  
elapsed since the vehicle was  
stopped by brake control.  
• The brake pedal is depressed  
after the vehicle is stopped by  
brake control.  
Detection area of the Parking  
Support Brake function (rear-  
crossing vehicles)  
The detection area of the Parking  
Support Brake function (rear-cross-  
ing vehicles) differs from the detec-  
tion area of the RCTA function  
(P.374). Therefore, even if the  
RCTA function detects a vehicle  
and provides an alert, the Parking  
Support Brake function (rear-cross-  
ing vehicles) may not start operat-  
ing.  
5
Examples of system oper-  
ation  
Situations in which the system  
may not operate properly  
The system operates when an  
approaching pedestrian is  
detected behind the vehicle  
while backing up, and when the  
brake pedal is not depressed or  
is depressed late.  
P.376  
Situations in which the system  
may operate even if there is no  
possibility of a collision  
P.377  
394  
Screen display of rear  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Hybrid system output restriction  
control  
pedestrian  
• The Parking Support Brake is  
enabled.  
• The vehicle speed is 9 mph (15  
km/h) or less.  
Displays a message to urge the  
driver to take evasive action  
when a pedestrian is detected in  
the detection area behind the  
vehicle.  
• The shift position is in R.  
• A pedestrian is to the rear of the  
vehicle  
• The PKSB (Parking Support  
Brake) determines that a stronger-  
than-normal brake operation is  
necessary to avoid a collision.  
Brake control  
• Hybrid system output restriction  
control is operating.  
• The Parking Support Brake deter-  
mines that an emergency brake  
operation is necessary to avoid a  
collision with a pedestrian.  
The Parking Support Brake  
function (rear pedestrians) will  
stop operating when  
A
Pedestrian detection icon  
The function will stop operating if  
any of the following conditions are  
met:  
B
“BRAKE!”  
WARNING  
Hybrid system output restriction  
control  
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-  
abled.  
• The collision becomes avoidable  
with normal brake operation.  
• The pedestrian is no longer  
detected behind your vehicle.  
If the Parking Support Brake  
function (rear pedestrians)  
operates unnecessarily  
Depress the brake pedal immedi-  
ately after the Parking Support  
Brake function (rear pedestrians)  
operates. (Operation of the func-  
tion is canceled by depressing the  
brake pedal.)  
Brake control  
• The Parking Support Brake is dis-  
abled.  
• Approximately 2 seconds have  
elapsed since the vehicle was  
stopped by brake control.  
• The brake pedal is depressed  
after the vehicle is stopped by  
brake control.  
Correct use of the Parking  
Support Brake function (rear  
pedestrians)  
P.378  
Parking Support Brake func-  
tion (rear pedestrians) will oper-  
ate when  
Re-enabling the Parking Sup-  
port Brake function (rear pedes-  
trians)  
The function will operate when the  
driving assist information indicator is  
not illuminated (P.150, 152) and  
all of the following conditions are  
met:  
P.387  
395  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Detection area of the Parking  
Support Brake function (rear  
pedestrians)  
Toyota Teammate  
*
Advanced Park  
The detection area of the Parking  
Support Brake function (rear pedes-  
trians) differs from the detection  
area of the RCD function (P.378).  
Therefore, even if the RCD function  
detects a pedestrian and provides  
an alert, the Parking Support Brake  
function (rear pedestrians) may not  
start operating.  
*
: If equipped  
Function description  
The Advanced Park is a system  
which assists in a safe and  
smooth parking or exiting from a  
parking space by displaying the  
blind spots around the vehicle  
and the target parking spot  
through a bird’s eye view, deliv-  
ering operation guidance  
Situations in which the system  
may not operate properly  
P.380  
Situations in which the system  
may operate unexpectedly  
P.381  
through displays and buzzer  
operation, and changing the  
shift position, operating the  
steering wheel, accelerator  
pedal, and brake pedal.  
5
Additionally, the panoramic view  
monitor* can display the area in  
front, behind, and from above  
the vehicle, helping confirm the  
condition of the area around the  
vehicle.  
The turn signal lights will blink  
automatically when the parking  
assistance starts until the vehi-  
cle reaches the target parking  
spot, to notify people around the  
vehicle that parking is being per-  
formed.  
Depending on the condition of  
the road surface or the vehicle,  
the distance between the vehi-  
cle and a parking space, etc., it  
may not be possible to assist in  
parking in the target space.  
396  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
*
: For details on the panoramic view  
monitor refer to “MULTIMEDIA  
OWNER’S MANUAL”.  
WARNING  
Cautions regarding the use of  
the system  
The recognition and control capa-  
bilities for this system are limited.  
The driver should always drive  
safety by always being responsi-  
ble without over relying on the  
system and have a understanding  
of the surrounding situations.  
Functions  
Perpendicular parking (for-  
ward/reverse) function  
Assistance is provided from the  
position the vehicle is stopped  
near the target parking space  
until the vehicle is in the parking  
space. (P.403)  
As with a normal vehicle, take  
care to observe your surround-  
ings while the vehicle is moving.  
Always pay attention to the  
vehicle’s surroundings while the  
system is operating and  
depress the brake pedal as nec-  
essary to slow or stop the vehi-  
cle.  
Perpendicular exiting (for-  
ward/reverse) function  
Assistance is provided from the  
parked position until the vehicle  
is in a position where you can  
easily exit from the parking  
space. (P.406)  
When parking, make sure that  
the vehicle can be parked in the  
target parking space before  
beginning operation.  
Depending on the condition of  
the road surface or the vehicle,  
the distance between the vehi-  
cle and a parking space, etc., it  
may not be possible to detect a  
parking space or the system  
may not be able to provide  
assistance to the point the vehi-  
cle is fully parked.  
Parallel parking function  
Assistance is provided from the  
position the vehicle is stopped  
near the target parking space  
until the vehicle is in the parking  
space. (P.408)  
Parallel exiting function  
This system will guide the vehi-  
cle to appropriate positions for  
changing the direction of travel,  
however, if you feel that the  
vehicle is approaching too close  
to an adjacent parked vehicle at  
any time, depress the brake  
pedal and change the shift posi-  
tion. However, if this is per-  
formed, the number of times the  
vehicle changes direction may  
increase, and the vehicle may  
be parked at an angle.  
Assistance is provided from the  
parked position until the vehicle  
is in a position where you can  
easily exit from the parking  
space. (P.412)  
Memory function  
Assistance is provided until the  
vehicle is guided into a previ-  
ously registered parking space.  
(P.414)  
397  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When the ambient temperature  
is extremely low, the screen  
may appear dark or the dis-  
played image may become  
unclear. Also, as moving  
objects may appear distorted or  
may not be able to be seen on  
the screen, make sure to  
directly check the safety of the  
area around your vehicle.  
WARNING  
As following objects may not be  
detected, make sure to check  
the safety of the area around  
your vehicle and depress the  
brake pedal to stop the vehicle if  
it may collide with an object.  
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.  
• Cotton, snow and other materi-  
als that absorb sound waves  
In the following situations, while  
the vehicle is stopped and held  
by Advanced Park, it may be  
canceled and the vehicle may  
start moving. Immediately  
depress the brake pedal. Fail-  
ure to do so may lead to an  
accident.  
• Sharply-angled objects  
• Low objects (curb stones, park-  
ing blocks, etc.)  
• Tall objects with upper sections  
projecting outwards in the direc-  
tion of your vehicle  
• When the driver’s door is  
opened  
Even if there is an object in the  
target parking space, it may not  
be detected and assistance  
may be performed.  
• When operations instructed by  
the system are not performed  
within a certain amount of time  
5
• When the brake pedal is  
depressed and the vehicle is  
stopped for a certain amount of  
time  
While the system is operating, if  
it is likely that your vehicle will  
collide with a nearby vehicle,  
parking block, object, or person,  
depress the brake pedal to stop  
the vehicle and press the  
• When the system malfunctions  
As the steering wheel will turn  
while this system is operating,  
pay attention to the following.  
Advanced Park main switch to  
disable the system.  
Never use only the Multimedia  
Display to view the area behind  
the vehicle. The image dis-  
played may differ than the  
actual situation. Using only the  
screen when backing up may  
lead to an accident, such as a  
collision with another vehicle.  
When backing up, make sure to  
look directly or use the mirrors  
to check the safety of the area  
around your vehicle, especially  
behind the vehicle.  
• Be careful so that a necktie,  
scarf, or arm does not get  
caught. Keep your upper body  
away from the steering wheel.  
Also, keep children away from  
the steering wheel.  
• Long fingernails may be caught  
and when the steering wheel is  
rotating, leading to injury.  
• In an emergency, depress the  
brake pedal to stop the vehicle,  
and then press the Advanced  
Park main switch to disable the  
system.  
398  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
• When there is a hole or gutter in  
WARNING  
the exit direction  
Do not allow anyone to put their  
hands outside of a window while  
this system is operating.  
• When in high pedestrian or  
vehicle traffic areas  
• When the parking space is in a  
location that is difficult to park in  
(too narrow for your vehicle,  
etc.)  
To ensure correct operation  
of the Advanced Park  
Observe the following precau-  
tions. Failing to do so may result  
in the vehicle being unable to be  
driven safely and possibly cause  
an accident.  
• When images are unclear due  
to dirt or snow attached to the  
camera lens, light being shined  
into the camera or shadows  
Do not use this system in situa-  
tions such as the following:  
• When tire chains or a compact  
spare tire is installed to the vehi-  
cle  
• When in areas other than com-  
mon parking spaces  
• When the doors or back door  
are not completely closed  
• When the surface of the parking  
space is sand or gravel and is  
not clearly defined with parking  
space lines  
• When an arm is held outside of  
a window  
• When the parking space is not  
level, such as when on a slope  
or has differences in height  
• In inclement weather such as  
heavy rain or snow  
Make sure to use only standard  
sized tires, such as those that  
were installed to the vehicle  
when it was shipped from the  
factory. Otherwise, Advanced  
Park may not operate properly.  
Also, when the tires have been  
replaced, the displayed position  
of the lines or box displayed on  
the screen may become incor-  
rect. When replacing the tires,  
contact your Toyota dealer.  
• Mechanical parking system  
• Parking lot with a device which  
raises to contact the bottom of  
the vehicle  
• When the road surface is fro-  
zen, slick, or covered with snow  
• When it is extremely hot and the  
asphalt is melting  
• When there are objects around  
the vehicle  
In situations such as the follow-  
ing, it may not be possible for  
the system to provide assis-  
tance to a registered parking  
spot:  
• When there is an object  
between your vehicle and the  
target parking spot or within the  
target parking spot (within the  
displayed blue box)  
• When the tires are extremely  
worn or the tire inflation pres-  
sure is low  
• When there is a gutter between  
your vehicle and the target park-  
ing space or within the target  
parking spot (within the dis-  
played blue box)  
• When carrying a heavy load  
• When the vehicle is tilted due to  
the carried load  
399  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Front camera  
WARNING  
• When a heater is installed in the  
surface of the parking space  
(road surface freeze prevention  
heater)  
• When the wheels are mis-  
aligned, such after a wheel has  
been subjected to a strong  
impact  
• When a pedestrian or passing  
vehicle is detected during assis-  
tance  
Side cameras  
• When something is incorrectly  
detected as a parking line (light,  
reflections from a building, dif-  
ference in height on the parking  
surface, a gutter, painted road  
lines, redrawn lines, etc.)  
If the vehicle deviates greatly from  
the set parking space in any situa-  
tion other than the above, have  
the vehicle inspected by your  
Toyota dealer.  
5
Rear camera  
NOTICE  
Precautions for use  
Advanced Park  
If the 12-volt battery was dis-  
charged or has been removed  
and installed, fold and extend the  
outside rear view mirrors.  
Types of cameras and  
sensors used for the  
Advanced Park  
Depending on the vehicle grade  
and equipped options, the  
actual rear camera may be dif-  
ferent from this illustration.  
Cameras and sensors are used  
to detect parked vehicles, mak-  
ing it easier to identify parking  
spaces.  
Sensors  
P.363  
Camera images  
As special cameras are used, the  
colors in displayed images may dif-  
fer from the actual color.  
400  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Precautions for use  
night, in an underground parking  
lot, parking garage, etc.  
For details on the following, refer to  
“Panoramic view monitor” of “Park-  
ing assist system” in the “MULTIME-  
DIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.  
• When it is raining or has rained  
and the road surface is wet and  
reflective or there are puddles  
• When the sun is shining directly  
into a camera, such as in the early  
morning or evening  
Displayable range of the screens  
Cameras  
• When the parking space is cov-  
ered with snow or de-icing agent  
• When there marks from repairs or  
other marks on the road surface,  
or there is a traffic bollard, or other  
object on the road surface  
Differences between displayed  
images and the actual road  
Differences between displayed  
images and the actual objects  
Detection range of the cameras  
and sensors  
• When the color or brightness of  
the road surface is uneven  
If a parked vehicle is behind the  
target parking space and the dis-  
tance between it and the vehicle  
becomes far, it may no longer be  
able to be detected. Depending on  
shape or condition of a parked  
vehicle, the detection range may  
become short or the vehicle may  
not be detected.  
• When a camera has been  
splashed by hot or cold water and  
the lens has fogged up  
• When the appearance of the park-  
ing space is affected by the  
shadow of the vehicle or trees  
• When a camera lens is dirty or  
covered with water droplets  
In situations such as the following,  
the target parking space may not  
be recognized correctly:  
• When there marks from repairs or  
other marks on the road surface,  
or there is a parking block, traffic  
bollard, or other object on the road  
surface  
• When it is raining or has rained  
and the road surface is wet and  
reflective or there are puddles  
• When the area around the vehicle  
is dark or backlit  
• When the color or brightness of  
the road surface is uneven  
• When the parking space is on a  
slope  
• When there are diagonal lines  
(access aisle) near the parking  
space  
• When the appearance of the park-  
ing space is affected by the  
shadow of a parked vehicle (such  
as shadows from the grille, side  
step, etc.)  
• When accessories which obstruct  
the view of the camera are  
installed  
• When the parking space lines are  
faded or dirty, making them  
Objects other than parked vehi-  
cles, such as columns, walls, etc.,  
may not be detected. Also, if they  
are detected, they may cause the  
target parking space to be mis-  
aligned.  
Situations in which parking  
space lines may not be recog-  
nized properly  
In situations such as the following,  
parking space lines on the road  
surface may not be detected:  
• When the parking space does not  
use lines (parking space boundar-  
ies are marked with rope, blocks,  
etc.)  
• When the parking space lines are  
faded or dirty, making them  
unclear  
• When the road surface is bright,  
such as concrete, and the contrast  
between it and the white parking  
space lines is small  
• When the parking space lines are  
any color other than yellow or  
white  
• When the area surrounding the  
parking space is dark, such as at  
401  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
unclear  
• Do not install any accessories  
near the detection area of the  
sensors.  
• When the appearance of the park-  
ing space is affected by the  
shadow of the vehicle or trees  
Sensor detection information  
P.365  
Turning the Advanced  
Park system on/off  
Objects which the sensor may  
not be properly detected  
Press the Advanced Park main  
switch.  
P.366  
Situations in which the sensor  
may not operate properly  
If the switch is pressed while assis-  
tance is being performed, the assis-  
tance will be canceled.  
P.366  
Situations in which parking  
assistance may not operate  
even if there is no possibility of  
a collision  
P.367  
WARNING  
Precautions for the cameras  
and sensors  
5
Due to the characteristics of the  
camera lens, the position of and  
distance to people and objects  
displayed on the screen may  
differ from the actual situation.  
For details, refer to “MULTIME-  
DIA OWNER’S MANUAL”.  
Operating conditions of the  
Advanced Park  
Assistance will begin when all of the  
following conditions are met:  
The brake pedal is depressed  
The vehicle is stopped  
Make sure to observe the pre-  
cautions for using the intuitive  
parking assist, otherwise a sen-  
sor may not operate correctly,  
possibly leading to an accident.  
(P.364)  
The driver’s seat belt is fastened  
The steering wheel is not being  
operated  
The accelerator pedal is not  
depressed  
In situations such as the follow-  
ing, the sensors may not oper-  
ate correctly, possibly leading to  
an accident. Proceed carefully.  
All of the doors and the back door  
are closed  
The outside rear view mirrors are  
not folded  
• When there is a parked vehicle  
next to the target parking space,  
if the displayed target parking  
space is far from the actual tar-  
get parking space, a sensor  
may be misaligned. Have the  
vehicle inspected by your  
Toyota dealer.  
The parking brake is not engaged  
The dynamic radar cruise control  
are not operating  
ABS, VSC, TRAC, PCS and  
PKSB are not operating  
The vehicle is not on a steep  
402  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Select to change between the  
slope  
memory function and the perpen-  
dicular parking (forward/reverse)  
function and parallel parking func-  
tion. (P.416)  
The VSC and TRAC are not  
turned off  
If assistance cannot be started,  
check the message displayed on  
the Multimedia Display (P.421).  
E
“Start” button  
Select to start parking assistance.  
Advanced Park guidance  
screens  
F
Perpendicular parking direc-  
tion change button  
Guidance screens are displayed  
on the Multimedia Display.  
Select to change between the park-  
ing (forward) function and parking  
(reverse) function  
Guidance screen (When  
assistance starts)  
: Change the perpendicular  
parking (forward) function  
: Change the perpendicular  
parking (reverse) function  
G
Customize setting button  
Select to display the Advanced  
Park setting screen. (P.420)  
H
Registration button  
Select to begin registering a park-  
ing space.  
A
Target parking space box  
(blue)  
Guidance screen (When  
reversing)  
B
C
Advice display  
Parking type change button  
If multiple buttons are displayed,  
depending on the condition of the  
button its function differs as follows.  
or : Change the target to  
another parking space.  
or : Select the current target  
parking space.  
A
Operation icon  
: Select to change to the parallel  
parking function  
Displayed when the Advanced Park  
is operating.  
: Change the perpendicular  
parking (forward/reverse) function  
B
Guide lines (yellow and red)  
Display points from the center of  
D
“MODE” button  
403  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
the edge of the front or rear bumper  
to the target stopping position (yel-  
*1  
Brake control operation when  
Advanced Park is operating  
While the Advanced Park is operat-  
ing, if the system determines that  
the possibility of collision with  
detected moving or stationary object  
is high, the hybrid system output  
restriction control and brake control  
will operate.  
low) and approximately 1 ft. (0.3  
m) (red) from the vehicle.  
C
Moving object warning icon  
D
Emergency support brake  
control operation display  
“BRAKE!” is displayed.  
If brake control operates, Advanced  
Park operation will be suspended  
and a message will be displayed on  
the multi-information display.  
E
Intuitive parking assist dis-  
play  
Buzzer  
P.363  
Depending on surrounding sounds  
or sounds from other systems, it  
may be difficult to hear the buzzer of  
this system.  
Rear camera washer switch*2  
F
(if equipped)  
Press shortly:  
If a black screen is displayed on  
the Multimedia Display when  
the Advanced Park is operating  
The rear camera washer operates  
for a certain period of time.  
The system is being affected by  
radio waves or may be malfunction-  
ing. If a radio antenna is installed  
near a camera, move it to a location  
as far from the cameras as possible.  
If a radio antenna is not installed  
near a camera, and the screen does  
not return to normal after turning the  
power switch off and then starting  
the hybrid system again, have the  
vehicle inspected by your Toyota  
dealer.  
Press and hold:  
5
The rear camera washer operates  
while the rear camera washer  
switch remains pressed.  
*1  
:The yellow lateral line is not dis-  
played when the target stopping  
position is approximately 8.2 ft.  
(2.5 m) or more away from the  
vehicle.  
*2  
:Refer to “Panoramic view moni-  
tor” of “Parking assist system” in  
the “MULTIMEDIA OWNER’S  
MANUAL”.  
Perpendicular parking  
(forward/reverse) function  
The perpendicular parking (for-  
ward/reverse) function can be  
used if the target parking space  
can be detected when the vehi-  
cle is stopped close and perpen-  
dicular to the center of the  
Intuitive parking assist pop-up  
display  
Regardless of whether the intuitive  
parking assist is off or on (P.364),  
if an object is detected by the intui-  
tive parking assist when the  
Advanced Park is operating, the  
intuitive parking assist pop up dis-  
play will automatically be displayed  
over the guidance display.  
parking space. Also, depending  
on the condition of the parking  
space, etc., if it is necessary to  
change the direction of travel of  
404  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
the vehicle, the shift position can  
be changed by assistance con-  
trol.  
If there is an adjacent parked  
vehicle  
Parking using the perpen-  
dicular parking (for-  
ward/reverse) function  
1 Stop the vehicle at a position  
close and perpendicular to  
the center of the target park-  
ing space.  
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)*  
A
If there are parking space  
lines  
B
Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or  
more*  
C
Approximately 19.7 ft. (6 m)  
or more*  
D
Approximately 18.0 ft. (5.5 m)  
or more*  
The system can operate even if  
there is a vehicle on only one side  
of the target parking space.  
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)*  
: This is a reference measurement  
*
A
for detection of a parking space.  
Depending on the surrounding  
environment, detection may not  
be possible.  
Approximately 8.2 ft. (2.5 m)*  
B
C
Approximately 19.7 ft. (6 m)  
or more*  
2 Press the Advanced Park  
main switch and check that a  
possible parking space is dis-  
D
Approximately 18.0 ft. (5.5 m)  
or more*  
The system can operate even if  
there is a parking space line on  
only one side of the target parking  
space.  
*
: This is a reference measurement  
for detection of a parking space.  
Depending on the surrounding  
environment, detection may not  
be possible.  
405  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
A buzzer will sound, an operation  
message will be displayed on the  
multi-information display, and  
assistance will begin operating.  
played on the Multimedia  
Display.  
When the brake pedal is  
released, “Moving Forward...”,  
“Backing Up...” will be dis-  
played and the vehicle will  
begin moving for-  
If a space which your vehicle  
can be parked is detected, a  
target parking space box will  
be displayed.  
ward/reverse.  
5
To cancel assistance, press  
the Advanced Park main  
switch.  
If it is possible to parallel park  
in the space, select the park-  
If assistance is canceled,  
“Advanced Park Cancel” will be dis-  
played.  
ing space, and then select  
to change to the parallel park-  
ing function.  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a surround-  
ing vehicle, object, person, or gut-  
ter: P.406  
If it is possible to change the  
direction which a parking  
space is entered, select the  
parking space, and then  
4 Perform operations as indi-  
cated by the advice displays  
until the vehicle stops in the  
target parking space.  
select  
direction.  
or  
change the  
Depending on the surround-  
ing environment, it may not be  
possible to use this function.  
According to the information  
displayed on the Multimedia  
Display, use the function on  
another parking space.  
When the vehicle stops, “Advanced  
Park Finished” will be displayed  
and parking assistance will end.  
If you select  
on the Multimedia  
Display, the vehicle displayed on  
the parking assist completion  
3 Select “Start” button.  
406  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
screen will rotate.  
As the target parking space will  
not be able to be set correctly if  
the surface of the parking space  
is on a slope or has differences  
in height, the vehicle may stray  
from the target parking space or  
be slanted. Therefore, do not  
use the function for this kind of  
parking spot.  
When parking in a narrow park-  
ing space, the vehicle may  
closely approach an adjacent  
parked vehicle. If a collision  
seems likely, depress the brake  
pedal to stop the vehicle.  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a sur-  
rounding vehicle, object, per-  
son, or gutter  
If a detected parked vehicle is  
narrow or parked extremely  
close to the curb, the position at  
which assistance will park the  
vehicle will also be close to the  
curb. If it seems likely the vehi-  
cle will collide with something or  
drive off of the road, depress  
the brake pedal to stop the vehi-  
cle, and then press the Advance  
Park main switch to disable the  
system.  
Depress the brake pedal to stop the  
vehicle and then change the shift  
position to change the direction of  
travel of the vehicle. At this time,  
assist will be suspended. However,  
if the “Start” button is selected,  
assist will resume and the vehicle  
will move in the direction corre-  
sponding to the selected shift posi-  
tion.  
When the brakes have been  
operated  
When the brakes have been oper-  
ated, brake operation sound may be  
heard. This does not indicate a mal-  
function.  
Advanced Park perpen-  
dicular exiting (for-  
ward/reverse) function  
When exiting from a perpendic-  
ular parking space, if the system  
determines that exit is possible  
the perpendicular exiting (for-  
ward/reverse) function can be  
used. Also, depending on the  
surrounding environment, if it is  
necessary to change the direc-  
tion of travel of the vehicle, the  
shift position can be changed by  
assistance control.  
NOTICE  
When using the perpendicu-  
lar parking (forward/reverse)  
function  
Make sure that there are no  
obstructions within the yellow  
guide lines and between the  
vehicle and target parking spot.  
If there are any obstructions  
between the vehicle and the tar-  
get parking space, or between  
the yellow guide lines, cancel  
the function.  
407  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
assistance will begin operating.  
Leaving a parking space  
using the perpendicular  
exiting (forward/reverse)  
function  
1 With the brake pedal  
depressed and P shift posi-  
tion selected, press the  
Advanced Park main switch  
and check that the exit direc-  
tion selection screen is dis-  
played on the Multimedia  
Display.  
To cancel assistance, press the  
Advanced Park main switch.  
If assistance is canceled,  
“Advanced Park Cancel” will be dis-  
played.  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a surround-  
ing vehicle, object, person, or gut-  
ter: P.406  
4 Perform operations as indi-  
cated by the advice displays  
until the vehicle is in a posi-  
tion where exit is possible.  
5
When the vehicle reaches a posi-  
tion where exit is possible, “You  
can exit by moving the steering  
wheel” will be displayed. If the  
steering wheel is operated,  
“Advanced Park Finished” will be  
displayed and assistance will end.  
2 Select an arrow on the Multi-  
media Display to select the  
direction you wish to exit.  
As assistance will end while the  
vehicle is moving, grip the steering  
wheel and drive forward.  
If the turn signal lever is operated,  
only exit to the left or right can be  
selected.  
If the steering wheel is not oper-  
ated, the vehicle will stop at the exit  
position. Assistance can be ended  
by depressing the accelerator pedal  
3 Depress the brake pedal and  
select “Start” button.  
A buzzer will sound, an operation  
message will be displayed on the  
multi-information display, and  
408  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
or brake pedal.  
When the brakes have been  
operated  
P.406  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a sur-  
rounding vehicle, object, per-  
son, or gutter  
Advanced Park parallel  
parking function  
The parallel parking function  
can be used if the target parking  
space can be detected when the  
vehicle is stopped close and  
aligned with the center of the  
parking space. Also, depending  
on the condition of the parking  
space, etc., if it is necessary to  
change the direction of travel of  
the vehicle, the shift position can  
be changed by assistance con-  
trol.  
P.406  
Perpendicular exiting (for-  
ward/reverse) function  
Do not use exiting (for-  
ward/reverse) function in any situa-  
tion other than when exiting a  
parallel parking spot. If assistance is  
started unintentionally, depress the  
brake pedal and stop the vehicle,  
then press the Advanced Park main  
switch to cancel assistance.  
Situations in which the perpen-  
dicularexiting (forward/reverse)  
function will not operate  
In situations such as the following,  
the perpendicular exiting (for-  
ward/reverse) function will not oper-  
ate:  
Parking using the parallel  
parking function  
When a vehicle which is waiting to  
park is in the exit direction  
1 Stop the vehicle with it  
aligned near the center of the  
target parking space.  
When a wall, column, or person is  
detected as near a front or rear  
center or corner sensor  
409  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
If there are parking space  
lines  
If there is an adjacent parked  
vehicle  
5
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) *  
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)*  
A
A
Approximately 19.7 ft. (6 m)*  
Approximately 23.0 ft. (7 m)  
or more*  
B
B
C
Approximately 14.8 ft. (4.5 m)  
or more*  
C
Approximately 14.8 ft. (4.5 m)  
or more*  
D
Approximately 26.2 ft. (8 m)  
or more*  
D
Approximately 26.2 ft. (8 m)  
or more*  
*
: This is a reference measurement  
for detection of a parking space.  
Depending on the surrounding  
environment, detection may not  
be possible.  
*
: This is a reference measurement  
for detection of a parking space.  
Depending on the surrounding  
environment, detection may not  
be possible.  
2 Press the Advanced Park  
main switch and check that a  
possible parking space is dis-  
410  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
assistance will begin operating.  
played on the Multimedia  
Display.  
When the brake pedal is  
released, “Moving Forward...”  
will be displayed and the vehi-  
cle will begin moving forward.  
To cancel assistance, press  
the Advanced Park main  
switch.  
If a space which your vehicle  
can be parked is detected, a  
target parking space box will  
be displayed.  
If assistance is canceled,  
“Advanced Park Cancel” will be dis-  
played.  
If it is possible to perpendicu-  
lar parking (forward/reverse)  
in the space, select the park-  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a surround-  
ing vehicle, object, person, or gut-  
ter: P.406  
ing space, and then select  
to change to the perpendicu-  
lar parking (forward/reverse)  
function.  
4 Perform operations as indi-  
cated by the advice displays  
until the vehicle stops in the  
target parking space.  
Depending on the surround-  
ing environment, it may not be  
possible to use this function.  
According to the information  
displayed on the Multimedia  
Display, use the function on  
another parking space.  
When the vehicle stops, “Advanced  
Park Finished” will be displayed  
and parking assistance will end.  
If you select  
on the Multimedia  
Display, the vehicle displayed on  
the parking assist completion  
3 Select “Start” button.  
A buzzer will sound, an operation  
message will be displayed on the  
multi-information display, and  
411  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
screen will rotate.  
NOTICE  
When using the parallel park-  
ing function  
Make sure that there are no  
obstructions within the yellow  
guide lines and between the  
vehicle and target parking spot.  
If any obstructions are detected  
within the yellow guide lines or  
between the vehicle and the tar-  
get parking space, the parallel  
parking function will be can-  
celled or suspended.  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a sur-  
rounding vehicle, object, per-  
son, or gutter  
As the target parking space will  
not be able to be set correctly if  
the surface of the parking space  
is on a slope or has differences  
in height, the vehicle may stray  
from the target parking space or  
be slanted. Therefore, do not  
use the parallel parking function  
for this kind of parking spot.  
P.406  
“No available parking space” is  
displayed  
Even if the vehicle is stopped paral-  
lel to a parking space, an adjacent  
parked vehicle may not be detected.  
In this case, if the vehicle is moved  
to a position that a parked vehicle  
can be detected, assistance can be  
started.  
5
If an adjacent parked vehicle is  
narrow or parked extremely  
close to the curb, the position at  
which assistance will park the  
vehicle will also be close to the  
curb. If it seems likely the vehi-  
cle will collide with the curb or  
drive off of the road, depress  
the brake pedal to stop the vehi-  
cle, and then press the  
Advanced Park main switch to  
disable the system.  
When the brakes have been  
operated  
P.406  
412  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
played on the Multimedia  
Display.  
NOTICE  
If there is a wall or other barrier  
on the inner side of the parking  
space, the vehicle may stop at a  
position slightly outside of the  
set target parking space.  
Advanced Park parallel  
exiting function  
When exiting from a parallel  
parking space, if the system  
determines that exit is possible  
the parallel exiting function can  
be used. Also, depending on the  
surrounding environment, if it is  
necessary to change the direc-  
tion of travel of the vehicle, the  
shift position can be changed by  
assistance control.  
2 Select an arrow on the Multi-  
media Display to select the  
direction you wish to exit.  
If the turn signal lever is operated,  
only exit to the left or right can be  
selected.  
3 Depress the brake pedal and  
Leaving a parking space  
using the parallel exiting  
function  
select “Start” button.  
A buzzer will sound, an operation  
message will be displayed on the  
multi-information display, and  
assistance will begin operating.  
1 With the brake pedal  
depressed and P shift posi-  
tion selected, press the  
To cancel assistance, press the  
Advanced Park main switch.  
Advanced Park main switch  
and check that the exit direc-  
tion selection screen is dis-  
If assistance is canceled,  
“Advanced Park Cancel” will be dis-  
played.  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a surround-  
ing vehicle, object, person, or gut-  
ter: P.406  
4 Perform operations as indi-  
cated by the advice displays  
until the vehicle is in a posi-  
tion where exit is possible.  
When the vehicle reaches a posi-  
tion where exit is possible, “You  
can exit by moving the steering  
413  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
wheel” will be displayed. If the  
steering wheel is operated,  
Situations in which the parallel  
exiting function will not operate  
“Advanced Park Finished” will be  
displayed and assistance will end.  
In situations such as the following,  
the parallel exiting function will not  
operate:  
As assistance will end while the  
vehicle is moving, grip the steering  
wheel and drive forward.  
When vehicles waiting at a traffic  
signal in the exit direction  
If the steering wheel is not oper-  
ated, the vehicle will stop at the exit  
position. Assistance can be ended  
by depressing the accelerator pedal  
or brake pedal.  
When a vehicle is stopped in the  
area behind where the vehicle will  
exit  
5
When a wall, column, or person is  
detected as near a front or rear  
side sensor  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a sur-  
rounding vehicle, object, per-  
son, or gutter  
P.406  
Parallel exiting function  
When the vehicle has been  
parked on a curb and a side sen-  
sor detects the road surface  
Do not use parallel exiting function  
in any situation other than when  
exiting a parallel parking spot. If  
assistance is started unintentionally,  
depress the brake pedal and stop  
the vehicle, then press the  
Advanced Park main switch to can-  
cel assistance.  
414  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
A
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)  
2 Press the main switch and  
then select  
.
If the Advanced Park main switch is  
pressed at a parking space without  
parking lines or any adjacent  
parked vehicles, “No available  
parking space” may be displayed.  
When a vehicle is not parked in  
front of the vehicle  
Continuously select and hold  
.
When there is excessive space  
between the front of the vehicle  
and a parked vehicle  
When the brakes have been  
operated  
P.406  
Advanced Park memory  
function  
The memory function can be  
used to park in a previously reg-  
istered parking space, even if  
there are no parking space lines  
or adjacent parked vehicles.  
3 Select perpendicular parking  
(forward/reverse) function or  
parallel parking function.  
Up to 3 parking spaces can be  
registered.  
Only parking spaces for which  
assist can be performed are dis-  
played.  
Registering a parking  
space  
1 Stop the vehicle with it  
aligned near the center of the  
target parking space.  
4 Select the parking direction.  
When perpendicular parking (for-  
ward/reverse) was selected in step  
415  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
3:  
moving forward.  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a surround-  
ing vehicle, object, person, or gut-  
ter: P.406  
When parallel parking was selected  
in step 3:  
5
5 Using the arrow buttons,  
adjust the position of the  
parking space to be regis-  
tered, and then select “OK”  
button.  
7 Perform operations as indi-  
cated by the advice displays  
until the vehicle stops in the  
target parking space.  
8 Check the position that the  
vehicle has stopped. If nec-  
essary, adjust the position of  
the parking spot to be regis-  
tered using the arrow but-  
tons, and then select “Reg.”  
button.  
“Registration Completed” will be  
displayed on the Multimedia Dis-  
6 Select “Start” button.  
A buzzer will sound, an operation  
message will be displayed on the  
multi-information display, and  
assistance will begin operating.  
When the brake pedal is released,  
“Moving Forward...” will be dis-  
played and the vehicle will begin  
416  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
play.  
played on the Multimedia  
Display.  
If the “MODE” button is displayed,  
the button can be touched to  
change between the memory func-  
tion, perpendicular parking (for-  
ward/reverse) function and parallel  
parking function.  
Register the parking space  
only if there are no obstruc-  
tions within the area shown by  
the thick lines.  
The amount that the position  
of the parking spot to be reg-  
istered can be adjusted is lim-  
ited.  
When parking in a parking  
space registered to the  
memory function  
3 Select the desired parking  
space, and then select “Start”  
button.  
1 Stop the vehicle with it  
aligned near the center of the  
target parking space.  
Perform the procedure for the per-  
pendicular parking (for-  
ward/reverse) function from step 3.  
(P.403)  
If you feel that the vehicle is  
approaching close to a sur-  
rounding vehicle, object, per-  
son, or gutter  
P.406  
When overwriting a registered  
parking space  
If the maximum number of parking  
spaces have been registered and  
A
Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m)  
is selected, a registered parking  
space can be selected and then  
overwritten with a new parking  
space.  
2 Press the Advanced Park  
main switch and check that a  
possible parking space is dis-  
417  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
• When it is raining or snowing  
• When the surrounding area is  
dark (at night, etc.)  
In situations such as the follow-  
ing, it may not be possible to  
register a parking space.  
• When there is insufficient space  
between the road and parking  
space  
When multiple parking spaces  
are registered  
Select the desired parking space,  
and then select “Start” button.  
• When the road surface around  
the parking space does not  
have any differences the sys-  
tem can recognize  
If a parking space has been reg-  
istered in situations such as the  
following, assistance may not  
be able to be started later or  
assistance to the registered  
position may not be possible.  
When the brakes have been  
• When shadows are cast on the  
parking space (there is a carport  
over the parking space, etc.)  
operated  
5
P.406  
NOTICE  
When using the memory  
function (P.406, 411)  
The memory function is a func-  
tion which provides assistance  
in parking in a previously regis-  
tered parking space. If the con-  
dition of the road surface,  
vehicle, or surrounding area dif-  
fers from when registration was  
performed, the parking space  
may not be able to be detected  
correctly or assistance may not  
be provided to the point that the  
vehicle is fully parked.  
• When there are leaves, gar-  
bage, or other objects which will  
likely move, in the parking  
space  
• When the road surface around  
the parking space has the same  
repeating pattern (brick, etc.)  
Do not register a parking space  
in situations such as the follow-  
ing, as the set parking space  
may not be able to be registered  
or assistance may not be possi-  
ble later.  
• When a camera lens is dirty or  
covered with water droplets  
418  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
• When there is a low protrusion  
NOTICE  
on the road surface near the  
parking space  
In situations such as the follow-  
ing, it may not be possible for  
the system to provide assis-  
tance to a registered parking  
spot:  
• When the parking space is on a  
slope  
• When a camera has been  
splashed by hot or cold water  
and the lens has fogged up  
• When the appearance of the  
parking space is affected by the  
shadow of the vehicle or trees  
• When a camera lens is dirty or  
covered with water droplets  
• When an object is detected in  
the registered parking space  
• When accessories which  
obstruct the view of the camera  
are installed  
If assistance is ended during  
registration, perform registration  
again.  
• When a pedestrian or passing  
vehicle is detected during assis-  
tance  
• When the position the vehicle is  
stopped when assistance is  
started differs from the position  
when registration was per-  
formed  
When registering a parking  
space to the memory function, if  
the road surface cannot be  
detected “No available parking  
space to register” will be dis-  
played.  
• When the registered parking  
space cannot be reached due to  
the existence of parking blocks,  
etc.  
When using the memory func-  
tion, make sure to stop immedi-  
ately in front of the stop  
position. Otherwise the parking  
space may not be able to be  
detected correctly or assis-  
tance may not be provided to  
the point that the vehicle is fully  
parked.  
• When the road surface around  
the parking space has changed  
(road surface has degraded or  
been resurfaced)  
• When the sunlight conditions  
differ from when registration  
was performed (due to weather  
or time of day)  
Do not use the memory function  
if a camera has been subjected  
to a strong impact or images of  
the panoramic view monitor are  
misaligned.  
• When the sun is shining directly  
into a camera, such as in the  
early morning or evening  
• When the color or brightness of  
the road surface is uneven  
If a camera has been replaced,  
as the installation angle of the  
camera will have changed, it will  
be necessary to reregister park-  
ing spaces of the memory func-  
tion.  
• When a light is temporarily  
shined on the parking space  
(lights of another vehicle, secu-  
rity light, etc.)  
• When the road surface around  
the parking space has the same  
repeating pattern  
419  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
stopped, “Cancel” was  
selected on the Multimedia  
Display  
Advanced Park cancel-  
ation/suspension  
Assistance will be can-  
celed when  
Assistance will be sus-  
pended when  
In situations such as the follow-  
ing, Advanced Park operation  
will be canceled. Firmly hold the  
steering wheel and depress the  
brake pedal to stop the vehicle.  
In situations such as the follow-  
ing, Advanced Park operation  
will be suspended.  
Assistance can be started again  
by following the directions dis-  
played on the Multimedia Dis-  
play.  
As system operation has been  
canceled, begin the operation  
again or continue parking manu-  
ally, using the steering wheel.  
Also, when assistance is sus-  
pended, if the shift position is  
changed twice with the brake  
pedal depressed, assistance will  
be canceled in that shift posi-  
tion. However, if assistance is  
suspended by changing the shift  
position, assistance will be can-  
celed if the shift position is  
changed once.  
The Advanced Park main  
switch is pushed  
The shift position has been  
changed to P  
5
The parking brake is engaged  
A door or the back door is  
opened  
The driver’s seat belt is unfas-  
tened  
The steering wheel is oper-  
ated  
The outside rear view mirrors  
are folded  
The accelerator pedal is  
depressed  
The TRAC or VSC is turned  
off  
The shift position has been  
changed  
The TRAC, VSC or ABS oper-  
ates  
A moving object or stationary  
object that may collide with  
your vehicle has been  
The power switch is pressed  
detected, resulting in the  
operation of the hybrid system  
output control/braking control.  
The system determines assis-  
tance cannot be continued in  
the current parking environ-  
ment  
Camera switch is pressed  
The system malfunctions  
While the vehicle was  
420  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
“Exit dir.: Par.”  
Changing the Advanced  
Park settings  
The preferred exit direction dis-  
played when it is possible to exit  
to the left or right from a parallel  
parking space can be selected.  
Select  
on the Multimedia  
Display, and then select  
“Advanced Park”.  
“Parking view”  
“Speed Profile”  
The display angle of the camera  
image when using the perpen-  
dicular parking (for-  
The vehicle speed for when  
assistance is performed can be  
set.  
ward/reverse) function or  
parallel parking function can be  
set.  
This setting cannot be changed  
when registering a parking  
space to the memory function.  
“Exit view”  
The display angle of the camera  
image when using the perpen-  
dicular exiting (forward/reverse)  
function or parallel parking exit  
function can be set.  
“Detect. range”  
The distance from which obsta-  
cles will be avoided while assis-  
tance is being performed can be  
set.  
“Parking Path Adjustment”  
“Prk. Method”  
The course for when parking  
assistance is operating can be  
adjusted inward or outward.  
The preferred parking direction  
displayed when at a parking  
space which perpendicular (for-  
ward/reverse) or parallel parking  
is possible can be set.  
If the tires are worn, the path of  
vehicle may be offset from the  
center of the parking space. In  
this case, use this setting to  
adjust the parking course.  
“Prk. direction”  
The preferred parking direction  
displayed when it is possible to  
pull perpendicular forward or  
reverse into a parking space can  
be selected.  
“Road Width Adjustment”  
When parking assistance is  
started, the amount of lateral  
movement while the vehicle is  
moving forward can be  
adjusted.  
“Exit dir.: Per.”  
The preferred exit direction dis-  
played when it is possible to pull  
forward or reverse to the left or  
right out of a parking space can  
be selected.  
“Park Position Adjustment  
(fwd.)”  
The position at which perpendic-  
421  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
ular parking (forward) is com-  
If it is likely that your vehicle will  
collide with a nearby vehi-  
cle/object, parking block, curb  
stone, etc., depress the brake  
pedal to stop the vehicle and  
press the Advanced Park main  
switch to disable the system.  
pleted can be adjusted. (Except  
when using the memory func-  
tion.)  
“Park Position Adjustment  
(rev.)”  
The position at which perpendic-  
ular parking (reverse) is com-  
pleted can be adjusted. (Except  
when using the memory func-  
tion.)  
Advanced Park displayed  
messages  
The operating state, assistance  
operation, etc. of the Advanced  
Park is displayed on the Multi-  
media Display. If a message is  
displayed, respond according to  
the content displayed.  
“Rear Accessory Setting”  
If an accessory, such as a trailer  
hitch, has been installed to the  
rear of the vehicle, the length of  
the rear of the vehicle can be  
adjusted to help avoid colliding  
with objects to the rear of the  
vehicle.  
If “No available parking space”  
is displayed  
5
Move the vehicle to a location where  
a parking space or parking lines can  
be detected.  
“Clear Registered Parking  
If “Unavailable in current condi-  
tion” is displayed  
Space”  
The parking spaces registered  
to the memory function can be  
deleted. Parking space informa-  
tion cannot be deleted when  
assistance is being performed  
or when registering parking  
space information to the mem-  
ory function.  
Move the vehicle to another location  
and use the system.  
If “Not enough space to exit” is  
displayed  
The parallel parking exit function  
cannot be used due to a situation  
such as the distance between your  
vehicle and vehicles parked in front  
of and behind your vehicle being  
short, the existence of an object in  
the exit direction, etc.  
NOTICE  
Check the conditions of the area  
around your vehicle and exit from  
the parking space manually.  
Take care when using the park  
position adjustment (forward) or  
park position adjustment  
(reverse) for adjusting because  
the vehicle may collide with  
parking blocks, curb stones, or  
other low objects.  
If “Cannot control speed” is  
displayed  
The system judged that it cannot  
adjust the speed of the vehicle when  
using the system in an area with a  
slope or step and assistance was  
canceled.  
422  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Use the system in a level location.  
Driving mode select  
sw itch  
If “Obstacle detected” is dis-  
played  
As a moving object or stationary  
object that may collide with your  
vehicle has been detected, the  
hybrid system output control/braking  
control operates to suspend  
The driving modes can be  
selected to suit the driving  
and usage conditions.  
Advanced Park assistance.  
Check the condition of the surround-  
ing area. To resume assistance,  
select the “Start” button on the Multi-  
media Display.  
Selecting a driving mode  
Operate the driving mode select  
switch forward or backward to  
select the desired driving mode.  
If “No available parking space  
to register” is displayed  
This message is displayed when  
is selected at a parking space that  
cannot be detected.  
Operate the system at a parking  
space where differences in the road  
surface can be recognized.  
(P.414)  
A
Indicator  
B
Driving mode select switch  
1 Normal mode  
Provides an optimal balance of fuel  
economy, quietness, and dynamic  
performance. Suitable for normal  
driving.  
2 Eco drive mode  
Helps the driver accelerate in an  
eco-friendly manner and improve  
fuel economy through moderate  
throttle characteristics and by con-  
trolling the operation of the air con-  
ditioning system (heating/cooling).  
423  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
When Eco drive mode is selected, Deactivate Eco drive mode  
Eco drive mode indicator comes  
on.  
Turn off eco air conditioning mode  
(P.440)  
Automatic deactivation of a  
3 Sport mode  
driving mode  
Controls the hybrid system to pro-  
vide quick, powerful acceleration.  
This mode also expands the possi-  
ble rate of deceleration by operat-  
ing the accelerator pedal and  
enables acceleration/deceleration  
control based on the driver’s inten-  
tions. This changes the steering  
feel, making it suitable for when  
agile driving response is desired,  
such as when driving on roads with  
many curves.  
Sport mode and Custom mode  
are automatically deactivated and  
the driving mode returns to normal  
mode when the power switch is  
turned to OFF.  
Normal mode and Eco drive mode  
are not deactivated until another  
driving mode is selected. (Even if  
the power switch is turned to OFF,  
normal mode and Eco drive mode  
will not be automatically deacti-  
vated.)  
Customization  
When Sport mode is selected,  
Sport mode indicator comes on.  
The custom mode can be changed.  
(Customizable features: P.618)  
4 Custom mode  
Allows you to drive with the power  
train, steering wheel and air condi-  
tioning system functions set to your  
preferred settings.  
5
Custom mode settings can only be  
changed on the drive mode cus-  
tomization display of Multimedia  
Display. (P.632)  
When the Custom mode is  
selected, Custom mode indicator  
comes on.  
Operation of the air condition-  
ing system in Eco drive mode  
When Eco drive mode is selected,  
the air conditioning system will auto-  
matically be changed to eco air con-  
ditioning mode.  
Eco air conditioning mode controls  
the heating/cooling operations and  
fan speed of the air conditioning  
system to enhance fuel efficiency.  
To improve air conditioning perfor-  
mance, perform the following opera-  
tions:  
Adjust the fan speed (P.435)  
424  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-  
trol)  
Driving assist system s  
Helps the driver to control skid-  
ding when swerving suddenly or  
turning on slippery road sur-  
faces.  
To keep driving safety and  
performance, the following  
systems operate automati-  
cally in response to various  
driving situations. Be  
Enhanced VSC (Enhanced  
Vehicle Stability Control)  
aware, however, that these  
systems are supplementary  
and should not be relied  
upon too heavily when oper-  
ating the vehicle.  
Provides cooperative control of  
the ABS, TRAC, VSC and EPS.  
Helps to maintain directional  
stability when swerving on slip-  
pery road surfaces by con-  
trolling steering performance.  
Summary of the driving  
assist systems  
TRAC (Traction Control)  
ECB (Electronically Con-  
trolled Brake System)  
Helps to maintain drive power  
and prevent the drive wheels  
from spinning when starting the  
vehicle or accelerating on slip-  
pery roads  
The electronically controlled  
system generates braking force  
corresponding to the brake  
operation  
Active Cornering Assist  
(ACA)  
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-  
tem)  
Helps to prevent the vehicle  
from drifting to the outer side by  
performing inner wheel brake  
control when attempting to  
accelerate while turning  
Helps to prevent wheel lock  
when the brakes are applied  
suddenly, or if the brakes are  
applied while driving on a slip-  
pery road surface  
Hill-start assist control  
Brake assist  
Helps to reduce the backward  
movement of the vehicle when  
starting on an uphill  
Generates an increased level of  
braking force after the brake  
pedal is depressed when the  
system detects a panic stop sit-  
uation  
EPS (Electric Power Steer-  
ing)  
Employs an electric motor to  
reduce the amount of effort  
needed to turn the steering  
425  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
The “Traction Control Turned OFF”  
will be shown on the multi-informa-  
tion display.  
wheel.  
The Secondary Collision  
Brake  
Press  
again to turn the system  
When the SRS airbag sensor  
detects a collision and the sys-  
tem operates, the brakes and  
brake lights are automatically  
controlled to reduce the vehicle  
speed and help reduce the pos-  
sibility of further damage due to  
a secondary collision.  
back on.  
Turning off both TRAC and VSC  
systems  
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems  
off, press and hold  
for more than  
3 seconds while the vehicle is  
stopped.  
The VSC OFF indicator light will  
come on and the “Traction Control  
Turned OFF” will be shown on the  
When the TRAC/VSC/ABS sys-  
tems are operating  
*
multi-information display.  
The slip indicator light will flash  
while the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems  
are operating.  
Press  
back on.  
*
again to turn the systems  
: PCS (Pre-Collision System) will  
also be disabled (only pre-collision  
warning is available). The PCS  
warning light will come on and a  
message will be displayed on the  
multi-information display.  
5
(P.298)  
When the message is dis-  
played on the multi-information  
display showing that TRAC has  
Disabling the TRAC system  
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt  
or snow, the TRAC system may  
reduce power from the hybrid sys-  
tem to the wheels.  
been disabled even if  
not been pressed  
has  
Pressing  
to turn the system off  
TRAC is temporary deactivated. If  
the information continues to show,  
contact your Toyota dealer.  
may make it easier for you to rock  
the vehicle in order to free it.  
To turn the TRAC system off,  
Operating conditions of hill-  
start assist control  
quickly press and release  
.
When all of the following conditions  
are met, the hill-start assist control  
will operate:  
The shift position is in a position  
other than P or N (when starting  
off forward/backward on an  
upward incline)  
The vehicle is stopped  
426  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
The accelerator pedal is not  
depressed  
engine compartment when one or  
two minutes passed after the stop  
of the hybrid system.  
The parking brake is not engaged  
The power switch is in ON  
Active Cornering Assist opera-  
tion sounds and vibrations  
Automatic system cancelation  
of hill-start assist control  
When the Active Cornering Assist is  
operated, operation sounds and  
vibrations may be generated from  
the brake system, but this is not a  
malfunction.  
The hill-start assist control will turn  
off in any of the following situations:  
Shift the shift position to P or N.  
Automatic reactivation of TRAC  
and VSC systems  
The accelerator pedal is  
depressed  
After turning the TRAC and VSC  
systems off, the systems will be  
automatically re-enabled in the fol-  
lowing situations:  
The brake pedal is depressed and  
the parking brake is engaged  
A maximum of 2 seconds have  
elapsed after the brake pedal is  
released  
When the power switch is turned  
off  
The power switch is turned to OFF  
If only the TRAC system is turned  
off, the TRAC will turn on when  
vehicle speed increases  
If both the TRAC and VSC sys-  
tems are turned off, automatic re-  
enabling will not occur when vehi-  
cle speed increases.  
Sounds and vibrations caused  
by the ABS, brake assist, VSC,  
TRAC and hill-start assist con-  
trol systems  
A sound may be heard from the  
engine compartment when the  
brake pedal is depressed repeat-  
edly, when the hybrid system is  
started or just after the vehicle  
begins to move. This sound does  
not indicate that a malfunction has  
occurred in any of these systems.  
Operating conditions of Active  
Cornering Assist  
The system operates when the fol-  
lowing occurs.  
TRAC/VSC can operate  
Any of the following conditions  
may occur when the above sys-  
tems are operating. None of these  
indicates that a malfunction has  
occurred.  
The driver is attempting to accel-  
erate while turning  
The system detects that the vehi-  
cle is drifting to the outer side  
• Vibrations may be felt through the  
vehicle body and steering.  
• A motor sound may be heard also  
after the vehicle comes to a stop.  
The brake pedal is released  
Reduced effectiveness of the  
EPS system  
The effectiveness of the EPS sys-  
tem is reduced to prevent the sys-  
tem from overheating when there is  
frequent steering input over an  
extended period of time. The steer-  
ing wheel may feel heavy as a  
ECB operating sound  
ECB operating sound may be heard  
in the following cases, but it does  
not indicate that a malfunction has  
occurred.  
result. Should this occur, refrain  
from excessive steering input or  
stop the vehicle and turn the hybrid  
system off. The EPS system should  
return to normal within 10 minutes.  
Operating sound heard from the  
engine compartment when the  
brake pedal is operated.  
Operating sound heard from the  
427  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Secondary Collision Brake  
operating conditions  
When driving over roads with  
potholes or uneven surfaces  
The system operates when the SRS  
airbag sensor detects a collision  
while the vehicle is in motion.  
However, the system does not oper-  
ate when the components are dam-  
aged.  
TRAC/VSC may not operate  
effectively when  
Directional control and power may  
not be achievable while driving on  
slippery road surfaces, even if the  
TRAC/VSC system is operating.  
Drive the vehicle carefully in con-  
ditions where stability and power  
may be lost.  
Secondary Collision Brake  
automatic cancellation  
The system is automatically can-  
celed in any of the following situa-  
tions.  
Active Cornering Assist does  
not operate effectively when  
The vehicle speed drops to  
approximately 0 mph (0 km/h).  
Do not overly rely on Active  
Cornering Assist. Active Corner-  
ing Assist may not operate  
effectively when accelerating  
down slopes or driving on slip-  
pery road surfaces.  
A certain amount of time elapses  
during operation  
The accelerator pedal is  
depressed a large amount  
When Active Cornering Assist  
frequently operates, Active Cor-  
nering Assist may temporarily  
stop operating to ensure proper  
operation of the brakes, TRAC  
and VSC.  
WARNING  
5
The ABS does not operate  
effectively when  
The limits of tire gripping perfor-  
mance have been exceeded  
(such as excessively worn tires  
on a snow-covered road).  
Hill-start assist control does  
not operate effectively when  
Do not overly rely on hill-start  
assist control. Hill-start assist  
control may not operate effec-  
tively on steep inclines and  
roads covered with ice.  
The vehicle hydroplanes while  
driving at high speed on wet or  
slick roads.  
Stopping distance when the  
ABS is operating may exceed  
that of normal conditions  
Unlike the parking brake, hill-  
start assist control is not  
intended to hold the vehicle sta-  
tionary for an extended period  
of time. Do not attempt to use  
hill-start assist control to hold  
the vehicle on an incline, as  
doing so may lead to an acci-  
dent.  
The ABS is not designed to  
shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-  
tance. Always maintain a safe dis-  
tance from the vehicle in front of  
you, especially in the following sit-  
uations:  
When driving on dirt, gravel or  
snow-covered roads  
When driving with tire chains  
When driving over bumps in the  
road  
428  
5-5. Using the driving support systems  
Secondary Collision Brake  
WARNING  
Do not rely solely upon the Sec-  
ondary Collision Brake. This sys-  
tem is designed to help reduce  
the possibility of further damage  
due to a secondary collision, how-  
ever, that effect changes accord-  
ing to various conditions. Overly  
relying on the system may result  
in death or serious injury.  
When the TRAC/ABS/VSC is  
activated  
The slip indicator light flashes.  
Always drive carefully. Reckless  
driving may cause an accident.  
Exercise particular care when the  
indicator light flashes.  
When the TRAC/VSC systems  
are turned off  
Be especially careful and drive at  
a speed appropriate to the road  
conditions. As these are the sys-  
tems to help ensure vehicle stabil-  
ity and driving force, do not turn  
the TRAC/VSC systems off  
unless necessary.  
Replacing tires  
Make sure that all tires are of the  
specified size, brand, tread pat-  
tern and total load capacity. In  
addition, make sure that the tires  
are inflated to the recommended  
tire inflation pressure level.  
The ABS, TRAC and VSC sys-  
tems will not function correctly if  
different tires are installed on the  
vehicle.  
Contact your Toyota dealer for  
further information when replacing  
tires or wheels.  
Handling of tires and the sus-  
pension  
Using tires with any kind of prob-  
lem or modifying the suspension  
will affect the driving assist sys-  
tems, and may cause a system to  
malfunction.  
429  
5-6. Driving tips  
5-6.Driving tips  
Use tires of the specified size.  
Winter driving tips  
Maintain the recommended  
level of air pressure.  
Carry out the necessary  
preparations and inspec-  
tions before driving the  
vehicle in winter. Always  
drive the vehicle in a man-  
ner appropriate to the pre-  
vailing weather conditions.  
Do not drive in excess of 75  
mph (120 km/h), regardless of  
the type of snow tires being  
used.  
Use snow tires on all, not just  
some wheels.  
Driving with tire chains  
(except 195/50R19 tires)  
Preparation for winter  
Observe the following precautions  
to reduce the risk of accidents.  
Failure to do so may result in the  
vehicle being unable to be driven  
safely, and may cause death or  
serious injury.  
Use fluids that are appropriate  
to the prevailing outside tem-  
peratures.  
• Engine oil  
Do not drive in excess of the  
speed limit specified for the tire  
chains being used, or 30 mph  
(50 km/h), whichever is lower.  
• Engine coolant  
• Power control unit coolant  
• Washer fluid  
5
Avoid driving on bumpy road  
surfaces or over potholes.  
Have a service technician  
inspect the condition of the  
12-volt battery.  
Avoid sudden acceleration,  
abrupt steering, sudden brak-  
ing and shifting operations that  
cause sudden engine braking.  
Have the vehicle fitted with  
four snow tires or purchase a  
set of tire chains for the front  
Slow down sufficiently before  
entering a curve to ensure that  
vehicle control is maintained.  
tires.*  
Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing  
Ensure that all tires are the same  
size and brand, and that chains  
match the size of the tires.  
Assist) system.  
Do not use LDA (Lane Depar-  
ture Alert) system.  
*
: Tire chains cannot be mounted  
on vehicles with 195/50R19 tires.  
WARNING  
Driving with snow tires  
Observe the following precautions  
to reduce the risk of accidents.  
Failure to do so may result in a  
loss of vehicle control and cause  
death or serious injury.  
430  
5-6. Driving tips  
When driving the vehicle  
NOTICE  
Repairing or replacing snow  
Accelerate the vehicle slowly,  
keep a safe distance between  
you and the vehicle ahead, and  
drive at a reduced speed suit-  
able to road conditions.  
tires  
Request repairs or replacement of  
snow tires from your Toyota  
dealer or legitimate tire retailers.  
This is because the removal and  
attachment of snow tires affects  
the operation of the tire pressure  
warning valves and transmitters.  
When parking the vehicle  
Turn automatic mode of the  
parking brake off.  
Before driving the vehicle  
Perform the following according  
to the driving conditions:  
Otherwise, the parking brake  
may freeze and not be able to  
be released automatically.  
Do not try to forcibly open a  
window or move a wiper that  
is frozen. Pour warm water  
over the frozen area to melt  
the ice. Wipe away the water  
immediately to prevent it from  
freezing.  
Also, avoid using the following as  
the parking brake may operate  
automatically, even if automatic  
mode is off.  
• Brake hold system  
Park the vehicle and shift the  
shift position to P without set-  
ting the parking brake. The  
parking brake may freeze up,  
preventing it from being  
released. If the vehicle is  
parked without setting the  
parking brake, make sure to  
block the wheels. Failure to  
do so may be dangerous  
because it may cause the  
vehicle to move unexpect-  
edly, possibly leading to an  
accident.  
To ensure proper operation of  
the climate control system  
fan, remove any snow that  
has accumulated on the air  
inlet vents in front of the wind-  
shield.  
Check for and remove any  
excess ice or snow that may  
have accumulated on the  
exterior lights, outside rear  
view mirrors, windows, vehi-  
cle’s roof, chassis, around the  
tires or on the brakes.  
When the parking brake is in  
automatic mode, release the  
parking brake after shifting  
the shift position to P.  
(P.264)  
Remove any snow or mud  
from the bottom of your shoes  
before getting in the vehicle.  
431  
5-6. Driving tips  
If the vehicle is parked without  
setting the parking brake,  
D
E
F
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter  
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width  
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length  
confirm that the shift position  
cannot be moved out of P.  
If the vehicle is left parked  
with the brakes damp in cold  
temperatures, there is a pos-  
sibility of the brakes freezing.  
Vehicles with 195/50R19 tires  
Tire chains cannot be mounted.  
Snow tires should be used  
instead.  
WARNING  
Regulations on the use of  
tire chains (except  
195/50R19 tires)  
When parking the vehicle  
When parking the vehicle without  
applying the parking brake, make  
sure to chock the wheels. If you  
do not chock the wheels, the vehi-  
cle may move unexpectedly, pos-  
sibly resulting in an accident.  
Regulations regarding the use  
of tire chains vary depending on  
location and type of road.  
Always check local regulations  
before installing chains.  
Selecting tire chains  
5
Vehicles without 195/50R19  
Tire chain installation  
tires  
Observe the following precautions  
when installing and removing  
chains:  
Use the correct tire chain size  
when mounting the tire chains.  
Chain size is regulated for each  
tire size.  
Install and remove tire chains in a  
safe location.  
Install tire chains on the front tires  
only. Do not install tire chains on  
the rear tires.  
Install tire chains on front tires as  
tightly as possible. Retighten  
chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile  
(0.5 - 1.0 km).  
Install tire chains following the  
instructions provided with the tire  
chains.  
Side chain:  
NOTICE  
A
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter  
Fitting tire chains  
The tire pressure warning valves  
and transmitters may not function  
correctly when tire chains are fit-  
ted.  
B
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width  
C
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length  
Cross chain:  
432  
5-6. Driving tips